| 1 | /* Symbol table lookup for the GNU debugger, GDB. |
| 2 | |
| 3 | Copyright (C) 1986-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 4 | |
| 5 | This file is part of GDB. |
| 6 | |
| 7 | This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify |
| 8 | it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by |
| 9 | the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or |
| 10 | (at your option) any later version. |
| 11 | |
| 12 | This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, |
| 13 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of |
| 14 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the |
| 15 | GNU General Public License for more details. |
| 16 | |
| 17 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
| 18 | along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */ |
| 19 | |
| 20 | #include "defs.h" |
| 21 | #include "symtab.h" |
| 22 | #include "gdbtypes.h" |
| 23 | #include "gdbcore.h" |
| 24 | #include "frame.h" |
| 25 | #include "target.h" |
| 26 | #include "value.h" |
| 27 | #include "symfile.h" |
| 28 | #include "objfiles.h" |
| 29 | #include "gdbcmd.h" |
| 30 | #include "gdb_regex.h" |
| 31 | #include "expression.h" |
| 32 | #include "language.h" |
| 33 | #include "demangle.h" |
| 34 | #include "inferior.h" |
| 35 | #include "source.h" |
| 36 | #include "filenames.h" /* for FILENAME_CMP */ |
| 37 | #include "objc-lang.h" |
| 38 | #include "d-lang.h" |
| 39 | #include "ada-lang.h" |
| 40 | #include "go-lang.h" |
| 41 | #include "p-lang.h" |
| 42 | #include "addrmap.h" |
| 43 | #include "cli/cli-utils.h" |
| 44 | #include "cli/cli-style.h" |
| 45 | #include "fnmatch.h" |
| 46 | #include "hashtab.h" |
| 47 | #include "typeprint.h" |
| 48 | |
| 49 | #include "gdb_obstack.h" |
| 50 | #include "block.h" |
| 51 | #include "dictionary.h" |
| 52 | |
| 53 | #include <sys/types.h> |
| 54 | #include <fcntl.h> |
| 55 | #include <sys/stat.h> |
| 56 | #include <ctype.h> |
| 57 | #include "cp-abi.h" |
| 58 | #include "cp-support.h" |
| 59 | #include "observable.h" |
| 60 | #include "solist.h" |
| 61 | #include "macrotab.h" |
| 62 | #include "macroscope.h" |
| 63 | |
| 64 | #include "parser-defs.h" |
| 65 | #include "completer.h" |
| 66 | #include "progspace-and-thread.h" |
| 67 | #include "gdbsupport/gdb_optional.h" |
| 68 | #include "filename-seen-cache.h" |
| 69 | #include "arch-utils.h" |
| 70 | #include <algorithm> |
| 71 | #include "gdbsupport/gdb_string_view.h" |
| 72 | #include "gdbsupport/pathstuff.h" |
| 73 | #include "gdbsupport/common-utils.h" |
| 74 | |
| 75 | /* Forward declarations for local functions. */ |
| 76 | |
| 77 | static void rbreak_command (const char *, int); |
| 78 | |
| 79 | static int find_line_common (struct linetable *, int, int *, int); |
| 80 | |
| 81 | static struct block_symbol |
| 82 | lookup_symbol_aux (const char *name, |
| 83 | symbol_name_match_type match_type, |
| 84 | const struct block *block, |
| 85 | const domain_enum domain, |
| 86 | enum language language, |
| 87 | struct field_of_this_result *); |
| 88 | |
| 89 | static |
| 90 | struct block_symbol lookup_local_symbol (const char *name, |
| 91 | symbol_name_match_type match_type, |
| 92 | const struct block *block, |
| 93 | const domain_enum domain, |
| 94 | enum language language); |
| 95 | |
| 96 | static struct block_symbol |
| 97 | lookup_symbol_in_objfile (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 98 | enum block_enum block_index, |
| 99 | const char *name, const domain_enum domain); |
| 100 | |
| 101 | /* Type of the data stored on the program space. */ |
| 102 | |
| 103 | struct main_info |
| 104 | { |
| 105 | main_info () = default; |
| 106 | |
| 107 | ~main_info () |
| 108 | { |
| 109 | xfree (name_of_main); |
| 110 | } |
| 111 | |
| 112 | /* Name of "main". */ |
| 113 | |
| 114 | char *name_of_main = nullptr; |
| 115 | |
| 116 | /* Language of "main". */ |
| 117 | |
| 118 | enum language language_of_main = language_unknown; |
| 119 | }; |
| 120 | |
| 121 | /* Program space key for finding name and language of "main". */ |
| 122 | |
| 123 | static const program_space_key<main_info> main_progspace_key; |
| 124 | |
| 125 | /* The default symbol cache size. |
| 126 | There is no extra cpu cost for large N (except when flushing the cache, |
| 127 | which is rare). The value here is just a first attempt. A better default |
| 128 | value may be higher or lower. A prime number can make up for a bad hash |
| 129 | computation, so that's why the number is what it is. */ |
| 130 | #define DEFAULT_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE 1021 |
| 131 | |
| 132 | /* The maximum symbol cache size. |
| 133 | There's no method to the decision of what value to use here, other than |
| 134 | there's no point in allowing a user typo to make gdb consume all memory. */ |
| 135 | #define MAX_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE (1024*1024) |
| 136 | |
| 137 | /* symbol_cache_lookup returns this if a previous lookup failed to find the |
| 138 | symbol in any objfile. */ |
| 139 | #define SYMBOL_LOOKUP_FAILED \ |
| 140 | ((struct block_symbol) {(struct symbol *) 1, NULL}) |
| 141 | #define SYMBOL_LOOKUP_FAILED_P(SIB) (SIB.symbol == (struct symbol *) 1) |
| 142 | |
| 143 | /* Recording lookups that don't find the symbol is just as important, if not |
| 144 | more so, than recording found symbols. */ |
| 145 | |
| 146 | enum symbol_cache_slot_state |
| 147 | { |
| 148 | SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED, |
| 149 | SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND, |
| 150 | SYMBOL_SLOT_FOUND |
| 151 | }; |
| 152 | |
| 153 | struct symbol_cache_slot |
| 154 | { |
| 155 | enum symbol_cache_slot_state state; |
| 156 | |
| 157 | /* The objfile that was current when the symbol was looked up. |
| 158 | This is only needed for global blocks, but for simplicity's sake |
| 159 | we allocate the space for both. If data shows the extra space used |
| 160 | for static blocks is a problem, we can split things up then. |
| 161 | |
| 162 | Global blocks need cache lookup to include the objfile context because |
| 163 | we need to account for gdbarch_iterate_over_objfiles_in_search_order |
| 164 | which can traverse objfiles in, effectively, any order, depending on |
| 165 | the current objfile, thus affecting which symbol is found. Normally, |
| 166 | only the current objfile is searched first, and then the rest are |
| 167 | searched in recorded order; but putting cache lookup inside |
| 168 | gdbarch_iterate_over_objfiles_in_search_order would be awkward. |
| 169 | Instead we just make the current objfile part of the context of |
| 170 | cache lookup. This means we can record the same symbol multiple times, |
| 171 | each with a different "current objfile" that was in effect when the |
| 172 | lookup was saved in the cache, but cache space is pretty cheap. */ |
| 173 | const struct objfile *objfile_context; |
| 174 | |
| 175 | union |
| 176 | { |
| 177 | struct block_symbol found; |
| 178 | struct |
| 179 | { |
| 180 | char *name; |
| 181 | domain_enum domain; |
| 182 | } not_found; |
| 183 | } value; |
| 184 | }; |
| 185 | |
| 186 | /* Symbols don't specify global vs static block. |
| 187 | So keep them in separate caches. */ |
| 188 | |
| 189 | struct block_symbol_cache |
| 190 | { |
| 191 | unsigned int hits; |
| 192 | unsigned int misses; |
| 193 | unsigned int collisions; |
| 194 | |
| 195 | /* SYMBOLS is a variable length array of this size. |
| 196 | One can imagine that in general one cache (global/static) should be a |
| 197 | fraction of the size of the other, but there's no data at the moment |
| 198 | on which to decide. */ |
| 199 | unsigned int size; |
| 200 | |
| 201 | struct symbol_cache_slot symbols[1]; |
| 202 | }; |
| 203 | |
| 204 | /* The symbol cache. |
| 205 | |
| 206 | Searching for symbols in the static and global blocks over multiple objfiles |
| 207 | again and again can be slow, as can searching very big objfiles. This is a |
| 208 | simple cache to improve symbol lookup performance, which is critical to |
| 209 | overall gdb performance. |
| 210 | |
| 211 | Symbols are hashed on the name, its domain, and block. |
| 212 | They are also hashed on their objfile for objfile-specific lookups. */ |
| 213 | |
| 214 | struct symbol_cache |
| 215 | { |
| 216 | symbol_cache () = default; |
| 217 | |
| 218 | ~symbol_cache () |
| 219 | { |
| 220 | xfree (global_symbols); |
| 221 | xfree (static_symbols); |
| 222 | } |
| 223 | |
| 224 | struct block_symbol_cache *global_symbols = nullptr; |
| 225 | struct block_symbol_cache *static_symbols = nullptr; |
| 226 | }; |
| 227 | |
| 228 | /* Program space key for finding its symbol cache. */ |
| 229 | |
| 230 | static const program_space_key<symbol_cache> symbol_cache_key; |
| 231 | |
| 232 | /* When non-zero, print debugging messages related to symtab creation. */ |
| 233 | unsigned int symtab_create_debug = 0; |
| 234 | |
| 235 | /* When non-zero, print debugging messages related to symbol lookup. */ |
| 236 | unsigned int symbol_lookup_debug = 0; |
| 237 | |
| 238 | /* The size of the cache is staged here. */ |
| 239 | static unsigned int new_symbol_cache_size = DEFAULT_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE; |
| 240 | |
| 241 | /* The current value of the symbol cache size. |
| 242 | This is saved so that if the user enters a value too big we can restore |
| 243 | the original value from here. */ |
| 244 | static unsigned int symbol_cache_size = DEFAULT_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE; |
| 245 | |
| 246 | /* True if a file may be known by two different basenames. |
| 247 | This is the uncommon case, and significantly slows down gdb. |
| 248 | Default set to "off" to not slow down the common case. */ |
| 249 | bool basenames_may_differ = false; |
| 250 | |
| 251 | /* Allow the user to configure the debugger behavior with respect |
| 252 | to multiple-choice menus when more than one symbol matches during |
| 253 | a symbol lookup. */ |
| 254 | |
| 255 | const char multiple_symbols_ask[] = "ask"; |
| 256 | const char multiple_symbols_all[] = "all"; |
| 257 | const char multiple_symbols_cancel[] = "cancel"; |
| 258 | static const char *const multiple_symbols_modes[] = |
| 259 | { |
| 260 | multiple_symbols_ask, |
| 261 | multiple_symbols_all, |
| 262 | multiple_symbols_cancel, |
| 263 | NULL |
| 264 | }; |
| 265 | static const char *multiple_symbols_mode = multiple_symbols_all; |
| 266 | |
| 267 | /* Read-only accessor to AUTO_SELECT_MODE. */ |
| 268 | |
| 269 | const char * |
| 270 | multiple_symbols_select_mode (void) |
| 271 | { |
| 272 | return multiple_symbols_mode; |
| 273 | } |
| 274 | |
| 275 | /* Return the name of a domain_enum. */ |
| 276 | |
| 277 | const char * |
| 278 | domain_name (domain_enum e) |
| 279 | { |
| 280 | switch (e) |
| 281 | { |
| 282 | case UNDEF_DOMAIN: return "UNDEF_DOMAIN"; |
| 283 | case VAR_DOMAIN: return "VAR_DOMAIN"; |
| 284 | case STRUCT_DOMAIN: return "STRUCT_DOMAIN"; |
| 285 | case MODULE_DOMAIN: return "MODULE_DOMAIN"; |
| 286 | case LABEL_DOMAIN: return "LABEL_DOMAIN"; |
| 287 | case COMMON_BLOCK_DOMAIN: return "COMMON_BLOCK_DOMAIN"; |
| 288 | default: gdb_assert_not_reached ("bad domain_enum"); |
| 289 | } |
| 290 | } |
| 291 | |
| 292 | /* Return the name of a search_domain . */ |
| 293 | |
| 294 | const char * |
| 295 | search_domain_name (enum search_domain e) |
| 296 | { |
| 297 | switch (e) |
| 298 | { |
| 299 | case VARIABLES_DOMAIN: return "VARIABLES_DOMAIN"; |
| 300 | case FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN: return "FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN"; |
| 301 | case TYPES_DOMAIN: return "TYPES_DOMAIN"; |
| 302 | case ALL_DOMAIN: return "ALL_DOMAIN"; |
| 303 | default: gdb_assert_not_reached ("bad search_domain"); |
| 304 | } |
| 305 | } |
| 306 | |
| 307 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 308 | |
| 309 | struct symtab * |
| 310 | compunit_primary_filetab (const struct compunit_symtab *cust) |
| 311 | { |
| 312 | gdb_assert (COMPUNIT_FILETABS (cust) != NULL); |
| 313 | |
| 314 | /* The primary file symtab is the first one in the list. */ |
| 315 | return COMPUNIT_FILETABS (cust); |
| 316 | } |
| 317 | |
| 318 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 319 | |
| 320 | enum language |
| 321 | compunit_language (const struct compunit_symtab *cust) |
| 322 | { |
| 323 | struct symtab *symtab = compunit_primary_filetab (cust); |
| 324 | |
| 325 | /* The language of the compunit symtab is the language of its primary |
| 326 | source file. */ |
| 327 | return SYMTAB_LANGUAGE (symtab); |
| 328 | } |
| 329 | |
| 330 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 331 | |
| 332 | bool |
| 333 | minimal_symbol::data_p () const |
| 334 | { |
| 335 | return type == mst_data |
| 336 | || type == mst_bss |
| 337 | || type == mst_abs |
| 338 | || type == mst_file_data |
| 339 | || type == mst_file_bss; |
| 340 | } |
| 341 | |
| 342 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 343 | |
| 344 | bool |
| 345 | minimal_symbol::text_p () const |
| 346 | { |
| 347 | return type == mst_text |
| 348 | || type == mst_text_gnu_ifunc |
| 349 | || type == mst_data_gnu_ifunc |
| 350 | || type == mst_slot_got_plt |
| 351 | || type == mst_solib_trampoline |
| 352 | || type == mst_file_text; |
| 353 | } |
| 354 | |
| 355 | /* See whether FILENAME matches SEARCH_NAME using the rule that we |
| 356 | advertise to the user. (The manual's description of linespecs |
| 357 | describes what we advertise). Returns true if they match, false |
| 358 | otherwise. */ |
| 359 | |
| 360 | bool |
| 361 | compare_filenames_for_search (const char *filename, const char *search_name) |
| 362 | { |
| 363 | int len = strlen (filename); |
| 364 | size_t search_len = strlen (search_name); |
| 365 | |
| 366 | if (len < search_len) |
| 367 | return false; |
| 368 | |
| 369 | /* The tail of FILENAME must match. */ |
| 370 | if (FILENAME_CMP (filename + len - search_len, search_name) != 0) |
| 371 | return false; |
| 372 | |
| 373 | /* Either the names must completely match, or the character |
| 374 | preceding the trailing SEARCH_NAME segment of FILENAME must be a |
| 375 | directory separator. |
| 376 | |
| 377 | The check !IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH ensures SEARCH_NAME "/dir/file.c" |
| 378 | cannot match FILENAME "/path//dir/file.c" - as user has requested |
| 379 | absolute path. The sama applies for "c:\file.c" possibly |
| 380 | incorrectly hypothetically matching "d:\dir\c:\file.c". |
| 381 | |
| 382 | The HAS_DRIVE_SPEC purpose is to make FILENAME "c:file.c" |
| 383 | compatible with SEARCH_NAME "file.c". In such case a compiler had |
| 384 | to put the "c:file.c" name into debug info. Such compatibility |
| 385 | works only on GDB built for DOS host. */ |
| 386 | return (len == search_len |
| 387 | || (!IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (search_name) |
| 388 | && IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (filename[len - search_len - 1])) |
| 389 | || (HAS_DRIVE_SPEC (filename) |
| 390 | && STRIP_DRIVE_SPEC (filename) == &filename[len - search_len])); |
| 391 | } |
| 392 | |
| 393 | /* Same as compare_filenames_for_search, but for glob-style patterns. |
| 394 | Heads up on the order of the arguments. They match the order of |
| 395 | compare_filenames_for_search, but it's the opposite of the order of |
| 396 | arguments to gdb_filename_fnmatch. */ |
| 397 | |
| 398 | bool |
| 399 | compare_glob_filenames_for_search (const char *filename, |
| 400 | const char *search_name) |
| 401 | { |
| 402 | /* We rely on the property of glob-style patterns with FNM_FILE_NAME that |
| 403 | all /s have to be explicitly specified. */ |
| 404 | int file_path_elements = count_path_elements (filename); |
| 405 | int search_path_elements = count_path_elements (search_name); |
| 406 | |
| 407 | if (search_path_elements > file_path_elements) |
| 408 | return false; |
| 409 | |
| 410 | if (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (search_name)) |
| 411 | { |
| 412 | return (search_path_elements == file_path_elements |
| 413 | && gdb_filename_fnmatch (search_name, filename, |
| 414 | FNM_FILE_NAME | FNM_NOESCAPE) == 0); |
| 415 | } |
| 416 | |
| 417 | { |
| 418 | const char *file_to_compare |
| 419 | = strip_leading_path_elements (filename, |
| 420 | file_path_elements - search_path_elements); |
| 421 | |
| 422 | return gdb_filename_fnmatch (search_name, file_to_compare, |
| 423 | FNM_FILE_NAME | FNM_NOESCAPE) == 0; |
| 424 | } |
| 425 | } |
| 426 | |
| 427 | /* Check for a symtab of a specific name by searching some symtabs. |
| 428 | This is a helper function for callbacks of iterate_over_symtabs. |
| 429 | |
| 430 | If NAME is not absolute, then REAL_PATH is NULL |
| 431 | If NAME is absolute, then REAL_PATH is the gdb_realpath form of NAME. |
| 432 | |
| 433 | The return value, NAME, REAL_PATH and CALLBACK are identical to the |
| 434 | `map_symtabs_matching_filename' method of quick_symbol_functions. |
| 435 | |
| 436 | FIRST and AFTER_LAST indicate the range of compunit symtabs to search. |
| 437 | Each symtab within the specified compunit symtab is also searched. |
| 438 | AFTER_LAST is one past the last compunit symtab to search; NULL means to |
| 439 | search until the end of the list. */ |
| 440 | |
| 441 | bool |
| 442 | iterate_over_some_symtabs (const char *name, |
| 443 | const char *real_path, |
| 444 | struct compunit_symtab *first, |
| 445 | struct compunit_symtab *after_last, |
| 446 | gdb::function_view<bool (symtab *)> callback) |
| 447 | { |
| 448 | struct compunit_symtab *cust; |
| 449 | const char* base_name = lbasename (name); |
| 450 | |
| 451 | for (cust = first; cust != NULL && cust != after_last; cust = cust->next) |
| 452 | { |
| 453 | for (symtab *s : compunit_filetabs (cust)) |
| 454 | { |
| 455 | if (compare_filenames_for_search (s->filename, name)) |
| 456 | { |
| 457 | if (callback (s)) |
| 458 | return true; |
| 459 | continue; |
| 460 | } |
| 461 | |
| 462 | /* Before we invoke realpath, which can get expensive when many |
| 463 | files are involved, do a quick comparison of the basenames. */ |
| 464 | if (! basenames_may_differ |
| 465 | && FILENAME_CMP (base_name, lbasename (s->filename)) != 0) |
| 466 | continue; |
| 467 | |
| 468 | if (compare_filenames_for_search (symtab_to_fullname (s), name)) |
| 469 | { |
| 470 | if (callback (s)) |
| 471 | return true; |
| 472 | continue; |
| 473 | } |
| 474 | |
| 475 | /* If the user gave us an absolute path, try to find the file in |
| 476 | this symtab and use its absolute path. */ |
| 477 | if (real_path != NULL) |
| 478 | { |
| 479 | const char *fullname = symtab_to_fullname (s); |
| 480 | |
| 481 | gdb_assert (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (real_path)); |
| 482 | gdb_assert (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (name)); |
| 483 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> fullname_real_path |
| 484 | = gdb_realpath (fullname); |
| 485 | fullname = fullname_real_path.get (); |
| 486 | if (FILENAME_CMP (real_path, fullname) == 0) |
| 487 | { |
| 488 | if (callback (s)) |
| 489 | return true; |
| 490 | continue; |
| 491 | } |
| 492 | } |
| 493 | } |
| 494 | } |
| 495 | |
| 496 | return false; |
| 497 | } |
| 498 | |
| 499 | /* Check for a symtab of a specific name; first in symtabs, then in |
| 500 | psymtabs. *If* there is no '/' in the name, a match after a '/' |
| 501 | in the symtab filename will also work. |
| 502 | |
| 503 | Calls CALLBACK with each symtab that is found. If CALLBACK returns |
| 504 | true, the search stops. */ |
| 505 | |
| 506 | void |
| 507 | iterate_over_symtabs (const char *name, |
| 508 | gdb::function_view<bool (symtab *)> callback) |
| 509 | { |
| 510 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> real_path; |
| 511 | |
| 512 | /* Here we are interested in canonicalizing an absolute path, not |
| 513 | absolutizing a relative path. */ |
| 514 | if (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (name)) |
| 515 | { |
| 516 | real_path = gdb_realpath (name); |
| 517 | gdb_assert (IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (real_path.get ())); |
| 518 | } |
| 519 | |
| 520 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 521 | { |
| 522 | if (iterate_over_some_symtabs (name, real_path.get (), |
| 523 | objfile->compunit_symtabs, NULL, |
| 524 | callback)) |
| 525 | return; |
| 526 | } |
| 527 | |
| 528 | /* Same search rules as above apply here, but now we look thru the |
| 529 | psymtabs. */ |
| 530 | |
| 531 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 532 | { |
| 533 | if (objfile->sf |
| 534 | && objfile->sf->qf->map_symtabs_matching_filename (objfile, |
| 535 | name, |
| 536 | real_path.get (), |
| 537 | callback)) |
| 538 | return; |
| 539 | } |
| 540 | } |
| 541 | |
| 542 | /* A wrapper for iterate_over_symtabs that returns the first matching |
| 543 | symtab, or NULL. */ |
| 544 | |
| 545 | struct symtab * |
| 546 | lookup_symtab (const char *name) |
| 547 | { |
| 548 | struct symtab *result = NULL; |
| 549 | |
| 550 | iterate_over_symtabs (name, [&] (symtab *symtab) |
| 551 | { |
| 552 | result = symtab; |
| 553 | return true; |
| 554 | }); |
| 555 | |
| 556 | return result; |
| 557 | } |
| 558 | |
| 559 | \f |
| 560 | /* Mangle a GDB method stub type. This actually reassembles the pieces of the |
| 561 | full method name, which consist of the class name (from T), the unadorned |
| 562 | method name from METHOD_ID, and the signature for the specific overload, |
| 563 | specified by SIGNATURE_ID. Note that this function is g++ specific. */ |
| 564 | |
| 565 | char * |
| 566 | gdb_mangle_name (struct type *type, int method_id, int signature_id) |
| 567 | { |
| 568 | int mangled_name_len; |
| 569 | char *mangled_name; |
| 570 | struct fn_field *f = TYPE_FN_FIELDLIST1 (type, method_id); |
| 571 | struct fn_field *method = &f[signature_id]; |
| 572 | const char *field_name = TYPE_FN_FIELDLIST_NAME (type, method_id); |
| 573 | const char *physname = TYPE_FN_FIELD_PHYSNAME (f, signature_id); |
| 574 | const char *newname = TYPE_NAME (type); |
| 575 | |
| 576 | /* Does the form of physname indicate that it is the full mangled name |
| 577 | of a constructor (not just the args)? */ |
| 578 | int is_full_physname_constructor; |
| 579 | |
| 580 | int is_constructor; |
| 581 | int is_destructor = is_destructor_name (physname); |
| 582 | /* Need a new type prefix. */ |
| 583 | const char *const_prefix = method->is_const ? "C" : ""; |
| 584 | const char *volatile_prefix = method->is_volatile ? "V" : ""; |
| 585 | char buf[20]; |
| 586 | int len = (newname == NULL ? 0 : strlen (newname)); |
| 587 | |
| 588 | /* Nothing to do if physname already contains a fully mangled v3 abi name |
| 589 | or an operator name. */ |
| 590 | if ((physname[0] == '_' && physname[1] == 'Z') |
| 591 | || is_operator_name (field_name)) |
| 592 | return xstrdup (physname); |
| 593 | |
| 594 | is_full_physname_constructor = is_constructor_name (physname); |
| 595 | |
| 596 | is_constructor = is_full_physname_constructor |
| 597 | || (newname && strcmp (field_name, newname) == 0); |
| 598 | |
| 599 | if (!is_destructor) |
| 600 | is_destructor = (startswith (physname, "__dt")); |
| 601 | |
| 602 | if (is_destructor || is_full_physname_constructor) |
| 603 | { |
| 604 | mangled_name = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (physname) + 1); |
| 605 | strcpy (mangled_name, physname); |
| 606 | return mangled_name; |
| 607 | } |
| 608 | |
| 609 | if (len == 0) |
| 610 | { |
| 611 | xsnprintf (buf, sizeof (buf), "__%s%s", const_prefix, volatile_prefix); |
| 612 | } |
| 613 | else if (physname[0] == 't' || physname[0] == 'Q') |
| 614 | { |
| 615 | /* The physname for template and qualified methods already includes |
| 616 | the class name. */ |
| 617 | xsnprintf (buf, sizeof (buf), "__%s%s", const_prefix, volatile_prefix); |
| 618 | newname = NULL; |
| 619 | len = 0; |
| 620 | } |
| 621 | else |
| 622 | { |
| 623 | xsnprintf (buf, sizeof (buf), "__%s%s%d", const_prefix, |
| 624 | volatile_prefix, len); |
| 625 | } |
| 626 | mangled_name_len = ((is_constructor ? 0 : strlen (field_name)) |
| 627 | + strlen (buf) + len + strlen (physname) + 1); |
| 628 | |
| 629 | mangled_name = (char *) xmalloc (mangled_name_len); |
| 630 | if (is_constructor) |
| 631 | mangled_name[0] = '\0'; |
| 632 | else |
| 633 | strcpy (mangled_name, field_name); |
| 634 | |
| 635 | strcat (mangled_name, buf); |
| 636 | /* If the class doesn't have a name, i.e. newname NULL, then we just |
| 637 | mangle it using 0 for the length of the class. Thus it gets mangled |
| 638 | as something starting with `::' rather than `classname::'. */ |
| 639 | if (newname != NULL) |
| 640 | strcat (mangled_name, newname); |
| 641 | |
| 642 | strcat (mangled_name, physname); |
| 643 | return (mangled_name); |
| 644 | } |
| 645 | |
| 646 | /* Set the demangled name of GSYMBOL to NAME. NAME must be already |
| 647 | correctly allocated. */ |
| 648 | |
| 649 | void |
| 650 | symbol_set_demangled_name (struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol, |
| 651 | const char *name, |
| 652 | struct obstack *obstack) |
| 653 | { |
| 654 | if (gsymbol->language == language_ada) |
| 655 | { |
| 656 | if (name == NULL) |
| 657 | { |
| 658 | gsymbol->ada_mangled = 0; |
| 659 | gsymbol->language_specific.obstack = obstack; |
| 660 | } |
| 661 | else |
| 662 | { |
| 663 | gsymbol->ada_mangled = 1; |
| 664 | gsymbol->language_specific.demangled_name = name; |
| 665 | } |
| 666 | } |
| 667 | else |
| 668 | gsymbol->language_specific.demangled_name = name; |
| 669 | } |
| 670 | |
| 671 | /* Return the demangled name of GSYMBOL. */ |
| 672 | |
| 673 | const char * |
| 674 | symbol_get_demangled_name (const struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol) |
| 675 | { |
| 676 | if (gsymbol->language == language_ada) |
| 677 | { |
| 678 | if (!gsymbol->ada_mangled) |
| 679 | return NULL; |
| 680 | /* Fall through. */ |
| 681 | } |
| 682 | |
| 683 | return gsymbol->language_specific.demangled_name; |
| 684 | } |
| 685 | |
| 686 | \f |
| 687 | /* Initialize the language dependent portion of a symbol |
| 688 | depending upon the language for the symbol. */ |
| 689 | |
| 690 | void |
| 691 | symbol_set_language (struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol, |
| 692 | enum language language, |
| 693 | struct obstack *obstack) |
| 694 | { |
| 695 | gsymbol->language = language; |
| 696 | if (gsymbol->language == language_cplus |
| 697 | || gsymbol->language == language_d |
| 698 | || gsymbol->language == language_go |
| 699 | || gsymbol->language == language_objc |
| 700 | || gsymbol->language == language_fortran) |
| 701 | { |
| 702 | symbol_set_demangled_name (gsymbol, NULL, obstack); |
| 703 | } |
| 704 | else if (gsymbol->language == language_ada) |
| 705 | { |
| 706 | gdb_assert (gsymbol->ada_mangled == 0); |
| 707 | gsymbol->language_specific.obstack = obstack; |
| 708 | } |
| 709 | else |
| 710 | { |
| 711 | memset (&gsymbol->language_specific, 0, |
| 712 | sizeof (gsymbol->language_specific)); |
| 713 | } |
| 714 | } |
| 715 | |
| 716 | /* Functions to initialize a symbol's mangled name. */ |
| 717 | |
| 718 | /* Objects of this type are stored in the demangled name hash table. */ |
| 719 | struct demangled_name_entry |
| 720 | { |
| 721 | demangled_name_entry (gdb::string_view mangled_name) |
| 722 | : mangled (mangled_name) {} |
| 723 | |
| 724 | gdb::string_view mangled; |
| 725 | enum language language; |
| 726 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> demangled; |
| 727 | }; |
| 728 | |
| 729 | /* Hash function for the demangled name hash. */ |
| 730 | |
| 731 | static hashval_t |
| 732 | hash_demangled_name_entry (const void *data) |
| 733 | { |
| 734 | const struct demangled_name_entry *e |
| 735 | = (const struct demangled_name_entry *) data; |
| 736 | |
| 737 | return fast_hash (e->mangled.data (), e->mangled.length ()); |
| 738 | } |
| 739 | |
| 740 | /* Equality function for the demangled name hash. */ |
| 741 | |
| 742 | static int |
| 743 | eq_demangled_name_entry (const void *a, const void *b) |
| 744 | { |
| 745 | const struct demangled_name_entry *da |
| 746 | = (const struct demangled_name_entry *) a; |
| 747 | const struct demangled_name_entry *db |
| 748 | = (const struct demangled_name_entry *) b; |
| 749 | |
| 750 | return da->mangled == db->mangled; |
| 751 | } |
| 752 | |
| 753 | static void |
| 754 | free_demangled_name_entry (void *data) |
| 755 | { |
| 756 | struct demangled_name_entry *e |
| 757 | = (struct demangled_name_entry *) data; |
| 758 | |
| 759 | e->~demangled_name_entry(); |
| 760 | } |
| 761 | |
| 762 | /* Create the hash table used for demangled names. Each hash entry is |
| 763 | a pair of strings; one for the mangled name and one for the demangled |
| 764 | name. The entry is hashed via just the mangled name. */ |
| 765 | |
| 766 | static void |
| 767 | create_demangled_names_hash (struct objfile_per_bfd_storage *per_bfd) |
| 768 | { |
| 769 | /* Choose 256 as the starting size of the hash table, somewhat arbitrarily. |
| 770 | The hash table code will round this up to the next prime number. |
| 771 | Choosing a much larger table size wastes memory, and saves only about |
| 772 | 1% in symbol reading. */ |
| 773 | |
| 774 | per_bfd->demangled_names_hash.reset (htab_create_alloc |
| 775 | (256, hash_demangled_name_entry, eq_demangled_name_entry, |
| 776 | free_demangled_name_entry, xcalloc, xfree)); |
| 777 | } |
| 778 | |
| 779 | /* Try to determine the demangled name for a symbol, based on the |
| 780 | language of that symbol. If the language is set to language_auto, |
| 781 | it will attempt to find any demangling algorithm that works and |
| 782 | then set the language appropriately. The returned name is allocated |
| 783 | by the demangler and should be xfree'd. */ |
| 784 | |
| 785 | static char * |
| 786 | symbol_find_demangled_name (struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol, |
| 787 | const char *mangled) |
| 788 | { |
| 789 | char *demangled = NULL; |
| 790 | int i; |
| 791 | |
| 792 | if (gsymbol->language == language_unknown) |
| 793 | gsymbol->language = language_auto; |
| 794 | |
| 795 | if (gsymbol->language != language_auto) |
| 796 | { |
| 797 | const struct language_defn *lang = language_def (gsymbol->language); |
| 798 | |
| 799 | language_sniff_from_mangled_name (lang, mangled, &demangled); |
| 800 | return demangled; |
| 801 | } |
| 802 | |
| 803 | for (i = language_unknown; i < nr_languages; ++i) |
| 804 | { |
| 805 | enum language l = (enum language) i; |
| 806 | const struct language_defn *lang = language_def (l); |
| 807 | |
| 808 | if (language_sniff_from_mangled_name (lang, mangled, &demangled)) |
| 809 | { |
| 810 | gsymbol->language = l; |
| 811 | return demangled; |
| 812 | } |
| 813 | } |
| 814 | |
| 815 | return NULL; |
| 816 | } |
| 817 | |
| 818 | /* Set both the mangled and demangled (if any) names for GSYMBOL based |
| 819 | on LINKAGE_NAME and LEN. Ordinarily, NAME is copied onto the |
| 820 | objfile's obstack; but if COPY_NAME is 0 and if NAME is |
| 821 | NUL-terminated, then this function assumes that NAME is already |
| 822 | correctly saved (either permanently or with a lifetime tied to the |
| 823 | objfile), and it will not be copied. |
| 824 | |
| 825 | The hash table corresponding to OBJFILE is used, and the memory |
| 826 | comes from the per-BFD storage_obstack. LINKAGE_NAME is copied, |
| 827 | so the pointer can be discarded after calling this function. */ |
| 828 | |
| 829 | void |
| 830 | symbol_set_names (struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol, |
| 831 | gdb::string_view linkage_name, bool copy_name, |
| 832 | struct objfile_per_bfd_storage *per_bfd) |
| 833 | { |
| 834 | struct demangled_name_entry **slot; |
| 835 | |
| 836 | if (gsymbol->language == language_ada) |
| 837 | { |
| 838 | /* In Ada, we do the symbol lookups using the mangled name, so |
| 839 | we can save some space by not storing the demangled name. */ |
| 840 | if (!copy_name) |
| 841 | gsymbol->name = linkage_name.data (); |
| 842 | else |
| 843 | { |
| 844 | char *name = (char *) obstack_alloc (&per_bfd->storage_obstack, |
| 845 | linkage_name.length () + 1); |
| 846 | |
| 847 | memcpy (name, linkage_name.data (), linkage_name.length ()); |
| 848 | name[linkage_name.length ()] = '\0'; |
| 849 | gsymbol->name = name; |
| 850 | } |
| 851 | symbol_set_demangled_name (gsymbol, NULL, &per_bfd->storage_obstack); |
| 852 | |
| 853 | return; |
| 854 | } |
| 855 | |
| 856 | if (per_bfd->demangled_names_hash == NULL) |
| 857 | create_demangled_names_hash (per_bfd); |
| 858 | |
| 859 | struct demangled_name_entry entry (linkage_name); |
| 860 | slot = ((struct demangled_name_entry **) |
| 861 | htab_find_slot (per_bfd->demangled_names_hash.get (), |
| 862 | &entry, INSERT)); |
| 863 | |
| 864 | /* If this name is not in the hash table, add it. */ |
| 865 | if (*slot == NULL |
| 866 | /* A C version of the symbol may have already snuck into the table. |
| 867 | This happens to, e.g., main.init (__go_init_main). Cope. */ |
| 868 | || (gsymbol->language == language_go && (*slot)->demangled == nullptr)) |
| 869 | { |
| 870 | /* A 0-terminated copy of the linkage name. Callers must set COPY_NAME |
| 871 | to true if the string might not be nullterminated. We have to make |
| 872 | this copy because demangling needs a nullterminated string. */ |
| 873 | gdb::string_view linkage_name_copy; |
| 874 | if (copy_name) |
| 875 | { |
| 876 | char *alloc_name = (char *) alloca (linkage_name.length () + 1); |
| 877 | memcpy (alloc_name, linkage_name.data (), linkage_name.length ()); |
| 878 | alloc_name[linkage_name.length ()] = '\0'; |
| 879 | |
| 880 | linkage_name_copy = gdb::string_view (alloc_name, |
| 881 | linkage_name.length ()); |
| 882 | } |
| 883 | else |
| 884 | linkage_name_copy = linkage_name; |
| 885 | |
| 886 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> demangled_name_ptr |
| 887 | (symbol_find_demangled_name (gsymbol, linkage_name_copy.data ())); |
| 888 | |
| 889 | /* Suppose we have demangled_name==NULL, copy_name==0, and |
| 890 | linkage_name_copy==linkage_name. In this case, we already have the |
| 891 | mangled name saved, and we don't have a demangled name. So, |
| 892 | you might think we could save a little space by not recording |
| 893 | this in the hash table at all. |
| 894 | |
| 895 | It turns out that it is actually important to still save such |
| 896 | an entry in the hash table, because storing this name gives |
| 897 | us better bcache hit rates for partial symbols. */ |
| 898 | if (!copy_name) |
| 899 | { |
| 900 | *slot |
| 901 | = ((struct demangled_name_entry *) |
| 902 | obstack_alloc (&per_bfd->storage_obstack, |
| 903 | sizeof (demangled_name_entry))); |
| 904 | new (*slot) demangled_name_entry (linkage_name); |
| 905 | } |
| 906 | else |
| 907 | { |
| 908 | /* If we must copy the mangled name, put it directly after |
| 909 | the struct so we can have a single allocation. */ |
| 910 | *slot |
| 911 | = ((struct demangled_name_entry *) |
| 912 | obstack_alloc (&per_bfd->storage_obstack, |
| 913 | sizeof (demangled_name_entry) |
| 914 | + linkage_name.length () + 1)); |
| 915 | char *mangled_ptr = reinterpret_cast<char *> (*slot + 1); |
| 916 | memcpy (mangled_ptr, linkage_name.data (), linkage_name.length ()); |
| 917 | mangled_ptr [linkage_name.length ()] = '\0'; |
| 918 | new (*slot) demangled_name_entry |
| 919 | (gdb::string_view (mangled_ptr, linkage_name.length ())); |
| 920 | } |
| 921 | (*slot)->demangled = std::move (demangled_name_ptr); |
| 922 | (*slot)->language = gsymbol->language; |
| 923 | } |
| 924 | else if (gsymbol->language == language_unknown |
| 925 | || gsymbol->language == language_auto) |
| 926 | gsymbol->language = (*slot)->language; |
| 927 | |
| 928 | gsymbol->name = (*slot)->mangled.data (); |
| 929 | if ((*slot)->demangled != nullptr) |
| 930 | symbol_set_demangled_name (gsymbol, (*slot)->demangled.get (), |
| 931 | &per_bfd->storage_obstack); |
| 932 | else |
| 933 | symbol_set_demangled_name (gsymbol, NULL, &per_bfd->storage_obstack); |
| 934 | } |
| 935 | |
| 936 | /* Return the source code name of a symbol. In languages where |
| 937 | demangling is necessary, this is the demangled name. */ |
| 938 | |
| 939 | const char * |
| 940 | symbol_natural_name (const struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol) |
| 941 | { |
| 942 | switch (gsymbol->language) |
| 943 | { |
| 944 | case language_cplus: |
| 945 | case language_d: |
| 946 | case language_go: |
| 947 | case language_objc: |
| 948 | case language_fortran: |
| 949 | if (symbol_get_demangled_name (gsymbol) != NULL) |
| 950 | return symbol_get_demangled_name (gsymbol); |
| 951 | break; |
| 952 | case language_ada: |
| 953 | return ada_decode_symbol (gsymbol); |
| 954 | default: |
| 955 | break; |
| 956 | } |
| 957 | return gsymbol->name; |
| 958 | } |
| 959 | |
| 960 | /* Return the demangled name for a symbol based on the language for |
| 961 | that symbol. If no demangled name exists, return NULL. */ |
| 962 | |
| 963 | const char * |
| 964 | symbol_demangled_name (const struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol) |
| 965 | { |
| 966 | const char *dem_name = NULL; |
| 967 | |
| 968 | switch (gsymbol->language) |
| 969 | { |
| 970 | case language_cplus: |
| 971 | case language_d: |
| 972 | case language_go: |
| 973 | case language_objc: |
| 974 | case language_fortran: |
| 975 | dem_name = symbol_get_demangled_name (gsymbol); |
| 976 | break; |
| 977 | case language_ada: |
| 978 | dem_name = ada_decode_symbol (gsymbol); |
| 979 | break; |
| 980 | default: |
| 981 | break; |
| 982 | } |
| 983 | return dem_name; |
| 984 | } |
| 985 | |
| 986 | /* Return the search name of a symbol---generally the demangled or |
| 987 | linkage name of the symbol, depending on how it will be searched for. |
| 988 | If there is no distinct demangled name, then returns the same value |
| 989 | (same pointer) as SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME. */ |
| 990 | |
| 991 | const char * |
| 992 | symbol_search_name (const struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol) |
| 993 | { |
| 994 | if (gsymbol->language == language_ada) |
| 995 | return gsymbol->name; |
| 996 | else |
| 997 | return symbol_natural_name (gsymbol); |
| 998 | } |
| 999 | |
| 1000 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 | bool |
| 1003 | symbol_matches_search_name (const struct general_symbol_info *gsymbol, |
| 1004 | const lookup_name_info &name) |
| 1005 | { |
| 1006 | symbol_name_matcher_ftype *name_match |
| 1007 | = get_symbol_name_matcher (language_def (gsymbol->language), name); |
| 1008 | return name_match (symbol_search_name (gsymbol), name, NULL); |
| 1009 | } |
| 1010 | |
| 1011 | \f |
| 1012 | |
| 1013 | /* Return true if the two sections are the same, or if they could |
| 1014 | plausibly be copies of each other, one in an original object |
| 1015 | file and another in a separated debug file. */ |
| 1016 | |
| 1017 | bool |
| 1018 | matching_obj_sections (struct obj_section *obj_first, |
| 1019 | struct obj_section *obj_second) |
| 1020 | { |
| 1021 | asection *first = obj_first? obj_first->the_bfd_section : NULL; |
| 1022 | asection *second = obj_second? obj_second->the_bfd_section : NULL; |
| 1023 | |
| 1024 | /* If they're the same section, then they match. */ |
| 1025 | if (first == second) |
| 1026 | return true; |
| 1027 | |
| 1028 | /* If either is NULL, give up. */ |
| 1029 | if (first == NULL || second == NULL) |
| 1030 | return false; |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | /* This doesn't apply to absolute symbols. */ |
| 1033 | if (first->owner == NULL || second->owner == NULL) |
| 1034 | return false; |
| 1035 | |
| 1036 | /* If they're in the same object file, they must be different sections. */ |
| 1037 | if (first->owner == second->owner) |
| 1038 | return false; |
| 1039 | |
| 1040 | /* Check whether the two sections are potentially corresponding. They must |
| 1041 | have the same size, address, and name. We can't compare section indexes, |
| 1042 | which would be more reliable, because some sections may have been |
| 1043 | stripped. */ |
| 1044 | if (bfd_section_size (first) != bfd_section_size (second)) |
| 1045 | return false; |
| 1046 | |
| 1047 | /* In-memory addresses may start at a different offset, relativize them. */ |
| 1048 | if (bfd_section_vma (first) - bfd_get_start_address (first->owner) |
| 1049 | != bfd_section_vma (second) - bfd_get_start_address (second->owner)) |
| 1050 | return false; |
| 1051 | |
| 1052 | if (bfd_section_name (first) == NULL |
| 1053 | || bfd_section_name (second) == NULL |
| 1054 | || strcmp (bfd_section_name (first), bfd_section_name (second)) != 0) |
| 1055 | return false; |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 | /* Otherwise check that they are in corresponding objfiles. */ |
| 1058 | |
| 1059 | struct objfile *obj = NULL; |
| 1060 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 1061 | if (objfile->obfd == first->owner) |
| 1062 | { |
| 1063 | obj = objfile; |
| 1064 | break; |
| 1065 | } |
| 1066 | gdb_assert (obj != NULL); |
| 1067 | |
| 1068 | if (obj->separate_debug_objfile != NULL |
| 1069 | && obj->separate_debug_objfile->obfd == second->owner) |
| 1070 | return true; |
| 1071 | if (obj->separate_debug_objfile_backlink != NULL |
| 1072 | && obj->separate_debug_objfile_backlink->obfd == second->owner) |
| 1073 | return true; |
| 1074 | |
| 1075 | return false; |
| 1076 | } |
| 1077 | |
| 1078 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1079 | |
| 1080 | void |
| 1081 | expand_symtab_containing_pc (CORE_ADDR pc, struct obj_section *section) |
| 1082 | { |
| 1083 | struct bound_minimal_symbol msymbol; |
| 1084 | |
| 1085 | /* If we know that this is not a text address, return failure. This is |
| 1086 | necessary because we loop based on texthigh and textlow, which do |
| 1087 | not include the data ranges. */ |
| 1088 | msymbol = lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_section (pc, section); |
| 1089 | if (msymbol.minsym && msymbol.minsym->data_p ()) |
| 1090 | return; |
| 1091 | |
| 1092 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 1093 | { |
| 1094 | struct compunit_symtab *cust = NULL; |
| 1095 | |
| 1096 | if (objfile->sf) |
| 1097 | cust = objfile->sf->qf->find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (objfile, msymbol, |
| 1098 | pc, section, 0); |
| 1099 | if (cust) |
| 1100 | return; |
| 1101 | } |
| 1102 | } |
| 1103 | \f |
| 1104 | /* Hash function for the symbol cache. */ |
| 1105 | |
| 1106 | static unsigned int |
| 1107 | hash_symbol_entry (const struct objfile *objfile_context, |
| 1108 | const char *name, domain_enum domain) |
| 1109 | { |
| 1110 | unsigned int hash = (uintptr_t) objfile_context; |
| 1111 | |
| 1112 | if (name != NULL) |
| 1113 | hash += htab_hash_string (name); |
| 1114 | |
| 1115 | /* Because of symbol_matches_domain we need VAR_DOMAIN and STRUCT_DOMAIN |
| 1116 | to map to the same slot. */ |
| 1117 | if (domain == STRUCT_DOMAIN) |
| 1118 | hash += VAR_DOMAIN * 7; |
| 1119 | else |
| 1120 | hash += domain * 7; |
| 1121 | |
| 1122 | return hash; |
| 1123 | } |
| 1124 | |
| 1125 | /* Equality function for the symbol cache. */ |
| 1126 | |
| 1127 | static int |
| 1128 | eq_symbol_entry (const struct symbol_cache_slot *slot, |
| 1129 | const struct objfile *objfile_context, |
| 1130 | const char *name, domain_enum domain) |
| 1131 | { |
| 1132 | const char *slot_name; |
| 1133 | domain_enum slot_domain; |
| 1134 | |
| 1135 | if (slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED) |
| 1136 | return 0; |
| 1137 | |
| 1138 | if (slot->objfile_context != objfile_context) |
| 1139 | return 0; |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | if (slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND) |
| 1142 | { |
| 1143 | slot_name = slot->value.not_found.name; |
| 1144 | slot_domain = slot->value.not_found.domain; |
| 1145 | } |
| 1146 | else |
| 1147 | { |
| 1148 | slot_name = SYMBOL_SEARCH_NAME (slot->value.found.symbol); |
| 1149 | slot_domain = SYMBOL_DOMAIN (slot->value.found.symbol); |
| 1150 | } |
| 1151 | |
| 1152 | /* NULL names match. */ |
| 1153 | if (slot_name == NULL && name == NULL) |
| 1154 | { |
| 1155 | /* But there's no point in calling symbol_matches_domain in the |
| 1156 | SYMBOL_SLOT_FOUND case. */ |
| 1157 | if (slot_domain != domain) |
| 1158 | return 0; |
| 1159 | } |
| 1160 | else if (slot_name != NULL && name != NULL) |
| 1161 | { |
| 1162 | /* It's important that we use the same comparison that was done |
| 1163 | the first time through. If the slot records a found symbol, |
| 1164 | then this means using the symbol name comparison function of |
| 1165 | the symbol's language with SYMBOL_SEARCH_NAME. See |
| 1166 | dictionary.c. It also means using symbol_matches_domain for |
| 1167 | found symbols. See block.c. |
| 1168 | |
| 1169 | If the slot records a not-found symbol, then require a precise match. |
| 1170 | We could still be lax with whitespace like strcmp_iw though. */ |
| 1171 | |
| 1172 | if (slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND) |
| 1173 | { |
| 1174 | if (strcmp (slot_name, name) != 0) |
| 1175 | return 0; |
| 1176 | if (slot_domain != domain) |
| 1177 | return 0; |
| 1178 | } |
| 1179 | else |
| 1180 | { |
| 1181 | struct symbol *sym = slot->value.found.symbol; |
| 1182 | lookup_name_info lookup_name (name, symbol_name_match_type::FULL); |
| 1183 | |
| 1184 | if (!SYMBOL_MATCHES_SEARCH_NAME (sym, lookup_name)) |
| 1185 | return 0; |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 | if (!symbol_matches_domain (SYMBOL_LANGUAGE (sym), |
| 1188 | slot_domain, domain)) |
| 1189 | return 0; |
| 1190 | } |
| 1191 | } |
| 1192 | else |
| 1193 | { |
| 1194 | /* Only one name is NULL. */ |
| 1195 | return 0; |
| 1196 | } |
| 1197 | |
| 1198 | return 1; |
| 1199 | } |
| 1200 | |
| 1201 | /* Given a cache of size SIZE, return the size of the struct (with variable |
| 1202 | length array) in bytes. */ |
| 1203 | |
| 1204 | static size_t |
| 1205 | symbol_cache_byte_size (unsigned int size) |
| 1206 | { |
| 1207 | return (sizeof (struct block_symbol_cache) |
| 1208 | + ((size - 1) * sizeof (struct symbol_cache_slot))); |
| 1209 | } |
| 1210 | |
| 1211 | /* Resize CACHE. */ |
| 1212 | |
| 1213 | static void |
| 1214 | resize_symbol_cache (struct symbol_cache *cache, unsigned int new_size) |
| 1215 | { |
| 1216 | /* If there's no change in size, don't do anything. |
| 1217 | All caches have the same size, so we can just compare with the size |
| 1218 | of the global symbols cache. */ |
| 1219 | if ((cache->global_symbols != NULL |
| 1220 | && cache->global_symbols->size == new_size) |
| 1221 | || (cache->global_symbols == NULL |
| 1222 | && new_size == 0)) |
| 1223 | return; |
| 1224 | |
| 1225 | xfree (cache->global_symbols); |
| 1226 | xfree (cache->static_symbols); |
| 1227 | |
| 1228 | if (new_size == 0) |
| 1229 | { |
| 1230 | cache->global_symbols = NULL; |
| 1231 | cache->static_symbols = NULL; |
| 1232 | } |
| 1233 | else |
| 1234 | { |
| 1235 | size_t total_size = symbol_cache_byte_size (new_size); |
| 1236 | |
| 1237 | cache->global_symbols |
| 1238 | = (struct block_symbol_cache *) xcalloc (1, total_size); |
| 1239 | cache->static_symbols |
| 1240 | = (struct block_symbol_cache *) xcalloc (1, total_size); |
| 1241 | cache->global_symbols->size = new_size; |
| 1242 | cache->static_symbols->size = new_size; |
| 1243 | } |
| 1244 | } |
| 1245 | |
| 1246 | /* Return the symbol cache of PSPACE. |
| 1247 | Create one if it doesn't exist yet. */ |
| 1248 | |
| 1249 | static struct symbol_cache * |
| 1250 | get_symbol_cache (struct program_space *pspace) |
| 1251 | { |
| 1252 | struct symbol_cache *cache = symbol_cache_key.get (pspace); |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | if (cache == NULL) |
| 1255 | { |
| 1256 | cache = symbol_cache_key.emplace (pspace); |
| 1257 | resize_symbol_cache (cache, symbol_cache_size); |
| 1258 | } |
| 1259 | |
| 1260 | return cache; |
| 1261 | } |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 | /* Set the size of the symbol cache in all program spaces. */ |
| 1264 | |
| 1265 | static void |
| 1266 | set_symbol_cache_size (unsigned int new_size) |
| 1267 | { |
| 1268 | struct program_space *pspace; |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 | ALL_PSPACES (pspace) |
| 1271 | { |
| 1272 | struct symbol_cache *cache = symbol_cache_key.get (pspace); |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 | /* The pspace could have been created but not have a cache yet. */ |
| 1275 | if (cache != NULL) |
| 1276 | resize_symbol_cache (cache, new_size); |
| 1277 | } |
| 1278 | } |
| 1279 | |
| 1280 | /* Called when symbol-cache-size is set. */ |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 | static void |
| 1283 | set_symbol_cache_size_handler (const char *args, int from_tty, |
| 1284 | struct cmd_list_element *c) |
| 1285 | { |
| 1286 | if (new_symbol_cache_size > MAX_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE) |
| 1287 | { |
| 1288 | /* Restore the previous value. |
| 1289 | This is the value the "show" command prints. */ |
| 1290 | new_symbol_cache_size = symbol_cache_size; |
| 1291 | |
| 1292 | error (_("Symbol cache size is too large, max is %u."), |
| 1293 | MAX_SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE); |
| 1294 | } |
| 1295 | symbol_cache_size = new_symbol_cache_size; |
| 1296 | |
| 1297 | set_symbol_cache_size (symbol_cache_size); |
| 1298 | } |
| 1299 | |
| 1300 | /* Lookup symbol NAME,DOMAIN in BLOCK in the symbol cache of PSPACE. |
| 1301 | OBJFILE_CONTEXT is the current objfile, which may be NULL. |
| 1302 | The result is the symbol if found, SYMBOL_LOOKUP_FAILED if a previous lookup |
| 1303 | failed (and thus this one will too), or NULL if the symbol is not present |
| 1304 | in the cache. |
| 1305 | *BSC_PTR and *SLOT_PTR are set to the cache and slot of the symbol, which |
| 1306 | can be used to save the result of a full lookup attempt. */ |
| 1307 | |
| 1308 | static struct block_symbol |
| 1309 | symbol_cache_lookup (struct symbol_cache *cache, |
| 1310 | struct objfile *objfile_context, enum block_enum block, |
| 1311 | const char *name, domain_enum domain, |
| 1312 | struct block_symbol_cache **bsc_ptr, |
| 1313 | struct symbol_cache_slot **slot_ptr) |
| 1314 | { |
| 1315 | struct block_symbol_cache *bsc; |
| 1316 | unsigned int hash; |
| 1317 | struct symbol_cache_slot *slot; |
| 1318 | |
| 1319 | if (block == GLOBAL_BLOCK) |
| 1320 | bsc = cache->global_symbols; |
| 1321 | else |
| 1322 | bsc = cache->static_symbols; |
| 1323 | if (bsc == NULL) |
| 1324 | { |
| 1325 | *bsc_ptr = NULL; |
| 1326 | *slot_ptr = NULL; |
| 1327 | return {}; |
| 1328 | } |
| 1329 | |
| 1330 | hash = hash_symbol_entry (objfile_context, name, domain); |
| 1331 | slot = bsc->symbols + hash % bsc->size; |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 | *bsc_ptr = bsc; |
| 1334 | *slot_ptr = slot; |
| 1335 | |
| 1336 | if (eq_symbol_entry (slot, objfile_context, name, domain)) |
| 1337 | { |
| 1338 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 1339 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 1340 | "%s block symbol cache hit%s for %s, %s\n", |
| 1341 | block == GLOBAL_BLOCK ? "Global" : "Static", |
| 1342 | slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND |
| 1343 | ? " (not found)" : "", |
| 1344 | name, domain_name (domain)); |
| 1345 | ++bsc->hits; |
| 1346 | if (slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND) |
| 1347 | return SYMBOL_LOOKUP_FAILED; |
| 1348 | return slot->value.found; |
| 1349 | } |
| 1350 | |
| 1351 | /* Symbol is not present in the cache. */ |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 1354 | { |
| 1355 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 1356 | "%s block symbol cache miss for %s, %s\n", |
| 1357 | block == GLOBAL_BLOCK ? "Global" : "Static", |
| 1358 | name, domain_name (domain)); |
| 1359 | } |
| 1360 | ++bsc->misses; |
| 1361 | return {}; |
| 1362 | } |
| 1363 | |
| 1364 | /* Clear out SLOT. */ |
| 1365 | |
| 1366 | static void |
| 1367 | symbol_cache_clear_slot (struct symbol_cache_slot *slot) |
| 1368 | { |
| 1369 | if (slot->state == SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND) |
| 1370 | xfree (slot->value.not_found.name); |
| 1371 | slot->state = SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED; |
| 1372 | } |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 | /* Mark SYMBOL as found in SLOT. |
| 1375 | OBJFILE_CONTEXT is the current objfile when the lookup was done, or NULL |
| 1376 | if it's not needed to distinguish lookups (STATIC_BLOCK). It is *not* |
| 1377 | necessarily the objfile the symbol was found in. */ |
| 1378 | |
| 1379 | static void |
| 1380 | symbol_cache_mark_found (struct block_symbol_cache *bsc, |
| 1381 | struct symbol_cache_slot *slot, |
| 1382 | struct objfile *objfile_context, |
| 1383 | struct symbol *symbol, |
| 1384 | const struct block *block) |
| 1385 | { |
| 1386 | if (bsc == NULL) |
| 1387 | return; |
| 1388 | if (slot->state != SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED) |
| 1389 | { |
| 1390 | ++bsc->collisions; |
| 1391 | symbol_cache_clear_slot (slot); |
| 1392 | } |
| 1393 | slot->state = SYMBOL_SLOT_FOUND; |
| 1394 | slot->objfile_context = objfile_context; |
| 1395 | slot->value.found.symbol = symbol; |
| 1396 | slot->value.found.block = block; |
| 1397 | } |
| 1398 | |
| 1399 | /* Mark symbol NAME, DOMAIN as not found in SLOT. |
| 1400 | OBJFILE_CONTEXT is the current objfile when the lookup was done, or NULL |
| 1401 | if it's not needed to distinguish lookups (STATIC_BLOCK). */ |
| 1402 | |
| 1403 | static void |
| 1404 | symbol_cache_mark_not_found (struct block_symbol_cache *bsc, |
| 1405 | struct symbol_cache_slot *slot, |
| 1406 | struct objfile *objfile_context, |
| 1407 | const char *name, domain_enum domain) |
| 1408 | { |
| 1409 | if (bsc == NULL) |
| 1410 | return; |
| 1411 | if (slot->state != SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED) |
| 1412 | { |
| 1413 | ++bsc->collisions; |
| 1414 | symbol_cache_clear_slot (slot); |
| 1415 | } |
| 1416 | slot->state = SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND; |
| 1417 | slot->objfile_context = objfile_context; |
| 1418 | slot->value.not_found.name = xstrdup (name); |
| 1419 | slot->value.not_found.domain = domain; |
| 1420 | } |
| 1421 | |
| 1422 | /* Flush the symbol cache of PSPACE. */ |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 | static void |
| 1425 | symbol_cache_flush (struct program_space *pspace) |
| 1426 | { |
| 1427 | struct symbol_cache *cache = symbol_cache_key.get (pspace); |
| 1428 | int pass; |
| 1429 | |
| 1430 | if (cache == NULL) |
| 1431 | return; |
| 1432 | if (cache->global_symbols == NULL) |
| 1433 | { |
| 1434 | gdb_assert (symbol_cache_size == 0); |
| 1435 | gdb_assert (cache->static_symbols == NULL); |
| 1436 | return; |
| 1437 | } |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | /* If the cache is untouched since the last flush, early exit. |
| 1440 | This is important for performance during the startup of a program linked |
| 1441 | with 100s (or 1000s) of shared libraries. */ |
| 1442 | if (cache->global_symbols->misses == 0 |
| 1443 | && cache->static_symbols->misses == 0) |
| 1444 | return; |
| 1445 | |
| 1446 | gdb_assert (cache->global_symbols->size == symbol_cache_size); |
| 1447 | gdb_assert (cache->static_symbols->size == symbol_cache_size); |
| 1448 | |
| 1449 | for (pass = 0; pass < 2; ++pass) |
| 1450 | { |
| 1451 | struct block_symbol_cache *bsc |
| 1452 | = pass == 0 ? cache->global_symbols : cache->static_symbols; |
| 1453 | unsigned int i; |
| 1454 | |
| 1455 | for (i = 0; i < bsc->size; ++i) |
| 1456 | symbol_cache_clear_slot (&bsc->symbols[i]); |
| 1457 | } |
| 1458 | |
| 1459 | cache->global_symbols->hits = 0; |
| 1460 | cache->global_symbols->misses = 0; |
| 1461 | cache->global_symbols->collisions = 0; |
| 1462 | cache->static_symbols->hits = 0; |
| 1463 | cache->static_symbols->misses = 0; |
| 1464 | cache->static_symbols->collisions = 0; |
| 1465 | } |
| 1466 | |
| 1467 | /* Dump CACHE. */ |
| 1468 | |
| 1469 | static void |
| 1470 | symbol_cache_dump (const struct symbol_cache *cache) |
| 1471 | { |
| 1472 | int pass; |
| 1473 | |
| 1474 | if (cache->global_symbols == NULL) |
| 1475 | { |
| 1476 | printf_filtered (" <disabled>\n"); |
| 1477 | return; |
| 1478 | } |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 | for (pass = 0; pass < 2; ++pass) |
| 1481 | { |
| 1482 | const struct block_symbol_cache *bsc |
| 1483 | = pass == 0 ? cache->global_symbols : cache->static_symbols; |
| 1484 | unsigned int i; |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 | if (pass == 0) |
| 1487 | printf_filtered ("Global symbols:\n"); |
| 1488 | else |
| 1489 | printf_filtered ("Static symbols:\n"); |
| 1490 | |
| 1491 | for (i = 0; i < bsc->size; ++i) |
| 1492 | { |
| 1493 | const struct symbol_cache_slot *slot = &bsc->symbols[i]; |
| 1494 | |
| 1495 | QUIT; |
| 1496 | |
| 1497 | switch (slot->state) |
| 1498 | { |
| 1499 | case SYMBOL_SLOT_UNUSED: |
| 1500 | break; |
| 1501 | case SYMBOL_SLOT_NOT_FOUND: |
| 1502 | printf_filtered (" [%4u] = %s, %s %s (not found)\n", i, |
| 1503 | host_address_to_string (slot->objfile_context), |
| 1504 | slot->value.not_found.name, |
| 1505 | domain_name (slot->value.not_found.domain)); |
| 1506 | break; |
| 1507 | case SYMBOL_SLOT_FOUND: |
| 1508 | { |
| 1509 | struct symbol *found = slot->value.found.symbol; |
| 1510 | const struct objfile *context = slot->objfile_context; |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 | printf_filtered (" [%4u] = %s, %s %s\n", i, |
| 1513 | host_address_to_string (context), |
| 1514 | SYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (found), |
| 1515 | domain_name (SYMBOL_DOMAIN (found))); |
| 1516 | break; |
| 1517 | } |
| 1518 | } |
| 1519 | } |
| 1520 | } |
| 1521 | } |
| 1522 | |
| 1523 | /* The "mt print symbol-cache" command. */ |
| 1524 | |
| 1525 | static void |
| 1526 | maintenance_print_symbol_cache (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 1527 | { |
| 1528 | struct program_space *pspace; |
| 1529 | |
| 1530 | ALL_PSPACES (pspace) |
| 1531 | { |
| 1532 | struct symbol_cache *cache; |
| 1533 | |
| 1534 | printf_filtered (_("Symbol cache for pspace %d\n%s:\n"), |
| 1535 | pspace->num, |
| 1536 | pspace->symfile_object_file != NULL |
| 1537 | ? objfile_name (pspace->symfile_object_file) |
| 1538 | : "(no object file)"); |
| 1539 | |
| 1540 | /* If the cache hasn't been created yet, avoid creating one. */ |
| 1541 | cache = symbol_cache_key.get (pspace); |
| 1542 | if (cache == NULL) |
| 1543 | printf_filtered (" <empty>\n"); |
| 1544 | else |
| 1545 | symbol_cache_dump (cache); |
| 1546 | } |
| 1547 | } |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 | /* The "mt flush-symbol-cache" command. */ |
| 1550 | |
| 1551 | static void |
| 1552 | maintenance_flush_symbol_cache (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 1553 | { |
| 1554 | struct program_space *pspace; |
| 1555 | |
| 1556 | ALL_PSPACES (pspace) |
| 1557 | { |
| 1558 | symbol_cache_flush (pspace); |
| 1559 | } |
| 1560 | } |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 | /* Print usage statistics of CACHE. */ |
| 1563 | |
| 1564 | static void |
| 1565 | symbol_cache_stats (struct symbol_cache *cache) |
| 1566 | { |
| 1567 | int pass; |
| 1568 | |
| 1569 | if (cache->global_symbols == NULL) |
| 1570 | { |
| 1571 | printf_filtered (" <disabled>\n"); |
| 1572 | return; |
| 1573 | } |
| 1574 | |
| 1575 | for (pass = 0; pass < 2; ++pass) |
| 1576 | { |
| 1577 | const struct block_symbol_cache *bsc |
| 1578 | = pass == 0 ? cache->global_symbols : cache->static_symbols; |
| 1579 | |
| 1580 | QUIT; |
| 1581 | |
| 1582 | if (pass == 0) |
| 1583 | printf_filtered ("Global block cache stats:\n"); |
| 1584 | else |
| 1585 | printf_filtered ("Static block cache stats:\n"); |
| 1586 | |
| 1587 | printf_filtered (" size: %u\n", bsc->size); |
| 1588 | printf_filtered (" hits: %u\n", bsc->hits); |
| 1589 | printf_filtered (" misses: %u\n", bsc->misses); |
| 1590 | printf_filtered (" collisions: %u\n", bsc->collisions); |
| 1591 | } |
| 1592 | } |
| 1593 | |
| 1594 | /* The "mt print symbol-cache-statistics" command. */ |
| 1595 | |
| 1596 | static void |
| 1597 | maintenance_print_symbol_cache_statistics (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 1598 | { |
| 1599 | struct program_space *pspace; |
| 1600 | |
| 1601 | ALL_PSPACES (pspace) |
| 1602 | { |
| 1603 | struct symbol_cache *cache; |
| 1604 | |
| 1605 | printf_filtered (_("Symbol cache statistics for pspace %d\n%s:\n"), |
| 1606 | pspace->num, |
| 1607 | pspace->symfile_object_file != NULL |
| 1608 | ? objfile_name (pspace->symfile_object_file) |
| 1609 | : "(no object file)"); |
| 1610 | |
| 1611 | /* If the cache hasn't been created yet, avoid creating one. */ |
| 1612 | cache = symbol_cache_key.get (pspace); |
| 1613 | if (cache == NULL) |
| 1614 | printf_filtered (" empty, no stats available\n"); |
| 1615 | else |
| 1616 | symbol_cache_stats (cache); |
| 1617 | } |
| 1618 | } |
| 1619 | |
| 1620 | /* This module's 'new_objfile' observer. */ |
| 1621 | |
| 1622 | static void |
| 1623 | symtab_new_objfile_observer (struct objfile *objfile) |
| 1624 | { |
| 1625 | /* Ideally we'd use OBJFILE->pspace, but OBJFILE may be NULL. */ |
| 1626 | symbol_cache_flush (current_program_space); |
| 1627 | } |
| 1628 | |
| 1629 | /* This module's 'free_objfile' observer. */ |
| 1630 | |
| 1631 | static void |
| 1632 | symtab_free_objfile_observer (struct objfile *objfile) |
| 1633 | { |
| 1634 | symbol_cache_flush (objfile->pspace); |
| 1635 | } |
| 1636 | \f |
| 1637 | /* Debug symbols usually don't have section information. We need to dig that |
| 1638 | out of the minimal symbols and stash that in the debug symbol. */ |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 | void |
| 1641 | fixup_section (struct general_symbol_info *ginfo, |
| 1642 | CORE_ADDR addr, struct objfile *objfile) |
| 1643 | { |
| 1644 | struct minimal_symbol *msym; |
| 1645 | |
| 1646 | /* First, check whether a minimal symbol with the same name exists |
| 1647 | and points to the same address. The address check is required |
| 1648 | e.g. on PowerPC64, where the minimal symbol for a function will |
| 1649 | point to the function descriptor, while the debug symbol will |
| 1650 | point to the actual function code. */ |
| 1651 | msym = lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_name (addr, ginfo->name, objfile); |
| 1652 | if (msym) |
| 1653 | ginfo->section = MSYMBOL_SECTION (msym); |
| 1654 | else |
| 1655 | { |
| 1656 | /* Static, function-local variables do appear in the linker |
| 1657 | (minimal) symbols, but are frequently given names that won't |
| 1658 | be found via lookup_minimal_symbol(). E.g., it has been |
| 1659 | observed in frv-uclinux (ELF) executables that a static, |
| 1660 | function-local variable named "foo" might appear in the |
| 1661 | linker symbols as "foo.6" or "foo.3". Thus, there is no |
| 1662 | point in attempting to extend the lookup-by-name mechanism to |
| 1663 | handle this case due to the fact that there can be multiple |
| 1664 | names. |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 | So, instead, search the section table when lookup by name has |
| 1667 | failed. The ``addr'' and ``endaddr'' fields may have already |
| 1668 | been relocated. If so, the relocation offset (i.e. the |
| 1669 | ANOFFSET value) needs to be subtracted from these values when |
| 1670 | performing the comparison. We unconditionally subtract it, |
| 1671 | because, when no relocation has been performed, the ANOFFSET |
| 1672 | value will simply be zero. |
| 1673 | |
| 1674 | The address of the symbol whose section we're fixing up HAS |
| 1675 | NOT BEEN adjusted (relocated) yet. It can't have been since |
| 1676 | the section isn't yet known and knowing the section is |
| 1677 | necessary in order to add the correct relocation value. In |
| 1678 | other words, we wouldn't even be in this function (attempting |
| 1679 | to compute the section) if it were already known. |
| 1680 | |
| 1681 | Note that it is possible to search the minimal symbols |
| 1682 | (subtracting the relocation value if necessary) to find the |
| 1683 | matching minimal symbol, but this is overkill and much less |
| 1684 | efficient. It is not necessary to find the matching minimal |
| 1685 | symbol, only its section. |
| 1686 | |
| 1687 | Note that this technique (of doing a section table search) |
| 1688 | can fail when unrelocated section addresses overlap. For |
| 1689 | this reason, we still attempt a lookup by name prior to doing |
| 1690 | a search of the section table. */ |
| 1691 | |
| 1692 | struct obj_section *s; |
| 1693 | int fallback = -1; |
| 1694 | |
| 1695 | ALL_OBJFILE_OSECTIONS (objfile, s) |
| 1696 | { |
| 1697 | int idx = s - objfile->sections; |
| 1698 | CORE_ADDR offset = ANOFFSET (objfile->section_offsets, idx); |
| 1699 | |
| 1700 | if (fallback == -1) |
| 1701 | fallback = idx; |
| 1702 | |
| 1703 | if (obj_section_addr (s) - offset <= addr |
| 1704 | && addr < obj_section_endaddr (s) - offset) |
| 1705 | { |
| 1706 | ginfo->section = idx; |
| 1707 | return; |
| 1708 | } |
| 1709 | } |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 | /* If we didn't find the section, assume it is in the first |
| 1712 | section. If there is no allocated section, then it hardly |
| 1713 | matters what we pick, so just pick zero. */ |
| 1714 | if (fallback == -1) |
| 1715 | ginfo->section = 0; |
| 1716 | else |
| 1717 | ginfo->section = fallback; |
| 1718 | } |
| 1719 | } |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 | struct symbol * |
| 1722 | fixup_symbol_section (struct symbol *sym, struct objfile *objfile) |
| 1723 | { |
| 1724 | CORE_ADDR addr; |
| 1725 | |
| 1726 | if (!sym) |
| 1727 | return NULL; |
| 1728 | |
| 1729 | if (!SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (sym)) |
| 1730 | return sym; |
| 1731 | |
| 1732 | /* We either have an OBJFILE, or we can get at it from the sym's |
| 1733 | symtab. Anything else is a bug. */ |
| 1734 | gdb_assert (objfile || symbol_symtab (sym)); |
| 1735 | |
| 1736 | if (objfile == NULL) |
| 1737 | objfile = symbol_objfile (sym); |
| 1738 | |
| 1739 | if (SYMBOL_OBJ_SECTION (objfile, sym)) |
| 1740 | return sym; |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | /* We should have an objfile by now. */ |
| 1743 | gdb_assert (objfile); |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 | switch (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym)) |
| 1746 | { |
| 1747 | case LOC_STATIC: |
| 1748 | case LOC_LABEL: |
| 1749 | addr = SYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (sym); |
| 1750 | break; |
| 1751 | case LOC_BLOCK: |
| 1752 | addr = BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)); |
| 1753 | break; |
| 1754 | |
| 1755 | default: |
| 1756 | /* Nothing else will be listed in the minsyms -- no use looking |
| 1757 | it up. */ |
| 1758 | return sym; |
| 1759 | } |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | fixup_section (&sym->ginfo, addr, objfile); |
| 1762 | |
| 1763 | return sym; |
| 1764 | } |
| 1765 | |
| 1766 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1767 | |
| 1768 | demangle_for_lookup_info::demangle_for_lookup_info |
| 1769 | (const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, language lang) |
| 1770 | { |
| 1771 | demangle_result_storage storage; |
| 1772 | |
| 1773 | if (lookup_name.ignore_parameters () && lang == language_cplus) |
| 1774 | { |
| 1775 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> without_params |
| 1776 | = cp_remove_params_if_any (lookup_name.name ().c_str (), |
| 1777 | lookup_name.completion_mode ()); |
| 1778 | |
| 1779 | if (without_params != NULL) |
| 1780 | { |
| 1781 | if (lookup_name.match_type () != symbol_name_match_type::SEARCH_NAME) |
| 1782 | m_demangled_name = demangle_for_lookup (without_params.get (), |
| 1783 | lang, storage); |
| 1784 | return; |
| 1785 | } |
| 1786 | } |
| 1787 | |
| 1788 | if (lookup_name.match_type () == symbol_name_match_type::SEARCH_NAME) |
| 1789 | m_demangled_name = lookup_name.name (); |
| 1790 | else |
| 1791 | m_demangled_name = demangle_for_lookup (lookup_name.name ().c_str (), |
| 1792 | lang, storage); |
| 1793 | } |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1796 | |
| 1797 | const lookup_name_info & |
| 1798 | lookup_name_info::match_any () |
| 1799 | { |
| 1800 | /* Lookup any symbol that "" would complete. I.e., this matches all |
| 1801 | symbol names. */ |
| 1802 | static const lookup_name_info lookup_name ({}, symbol_name_match_type::FULL, |
| 1803 | true); |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 | return lookup_name; |
| 1806 | } |
| 1807 | |
| 1808 | /* Compute the demangled form of NAME as used by the various symbol |
| 1809 | lookup functions. The result can either be the input NAME |
| 1810 | directly, or a pointer to a buffer owned by the STORAGE object. |
| 1811 | |
| 1812 | For Ada, this function just returns NAME, unmodified. |
| 1813 | Normally, Ada symbol lookups are performed using the encoded name |
| 1814 | rather than the demangled name, and so it might seem to make sense |
| 1815 | for this function to return an encoded version of NAME. |
| 1816 | Unfortunately, we cannot do this, because this function is used in |
| 1817 | circumstances where it is not appropriate to try to encode NAME. |
| 1818 | For instance, when displaying the frame info, we demangle the name |
| 1819 | of each parameter, and then perform a symbol lookup inside our |
| 1820 | function using that demangled name. In Ada, certain functions |
| 1821 | have internally-generated parameters whose name contain uppercase |
| 1822 | characters. Encoding those name would result in those uppercase |
| 1823 | characters to become lowercase, and thus cause the symbol lookup |
| 1824 | to fail. */ |
| 1825 | |
| 1826 | const char * |
| 1827 | demangle_for_lookup (const char *name, enum language lang, |
| 1828 | demangle_result_storage &storage) |
| 1829 | { |
| 1830 | /* If we are using C++, D, or Go, demangle the name before doing a |
| 1831 | lookup, so we can always binary search. */ |
| 1832 | if (lang == language_cplus) |
| 1833 | { |
| 1834 | char *demangled_name = gdb_demangle (name, DMGL_ANSI | DMGL_PARAMS); |
| 1835 | if (demangled_name != NULL) |
| 1836 | return storage.set_malloc_ptr (demangled_name); |
| 1837 | |
| 1838 | /* If we were given a non-mangled name, canonicalize it |
| 1839 | according to the language (so far only for C++). */ |
| 1840 | std::string canon = cp_canonicalize_string (name); |
| 1841 | if (!canon.empty ()) |
| 1842 | return storage.swap_string (canon); |
| 1843 | } |
| 1844 | else if (lang == language_d) |
| 1845 | { |
| 1846 | char *demangled_name = d_demangle (name, 0); |
| 1847 | if (demangled_name != NULL) |
| 1848 | return storage.set_malloc_ptr (demangled_name); |
| 1849 | } |
| 1850 | else if (lang == language_go) |
| 1851 | { |
| 1852 | char *demangled_name = go_demangle (name, 0); |
| 1853 | if (demangled_name != NULL) |
| 1854 | return storage.set_malloc_ptr (demangled_name); |
| 1855 | } |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 | return name; |
| 1858 | } |
| 1859 | |
| 1860 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 | unsigned int |
| 1863 | search_name_hash (enum language language, const char *search_name) |
| 1864 | { |
| 1865 | return language_def (language)->la_search_name_hash (search_name); |
| 1866 | } |
| 1867 | |
| 1868 | /* See symtab.h. |
| 1869 | |
| 1870 | This function (or rather its subordinates) have a bunch of loops and |
| 1871 | it would seem to be attractive to put in some QUIT's (though I'm not really |
| 1872 | sure whether it can run long enough to be really important). But there |
| 1873 | are a few calls for which it would appear to be bad news to quit |
| 1874 | out of here: e.g., find_proc_desc in alpha-mdebug-tdep.c. (Note |
| 1875 | that there is C++ code below which can error(), but that probably |
| 1876 | doesn't affect these calls since they are looking for a known |
| 1877 | variable and thus can probably assume it will never hit the C++ |
| 1878 | code). */ |
| 1879 | |
| 1880 | struct block_symbol |
| 1881 | lookup_symbol_in_language (const char *name, const struct block *block, |
| 1882 | const domain_enum domain, enum language lang, |
| 1883 | struct field_of_this_result *is_a_field_of_this) |
| 1884 | { |
| 1885 | demangle_result_storage storage; |
| 1886 | const char *modified_name = demangle_for_lookup (name, lang, storage); |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 | return lookup_symbol_aux (modified_name, |
| 1889 | symbol_name_match_type::FULL, |
| 1890 | block, domain, lang, |
| 1891 | is_a_field_of_this); |
| 1892 | } |
| 1893 | |
| 1894 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1895 | |
| 1896 | struct block_symbol |
| 1897 | lookup_symbol (const char *name, const struct block *block, |
| 1898 | domain_enum domain, |
| 1899 | struct field_of_this_result *is_a_field_of_this) |
| 1900 | { |
| 1901 | return lookup_symbol_in_language (name, block, domain, |
| 1902 | current_language->la_language, |
| 1903 | is_a_field_of_this); |
| 1904 | } |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1907 | |
| 1908 | struct block_symbol |
| 1909 | lookup_symbol_search_name (const char *search_name, const struct block *block, |
| 1910 | domain_enum domain) |
| 1911 | { |
| 1912 | return lookup_symbol_aux (search_name, symbol_name_match_type::SEARCH_NAME, |
| 1913 | block, domain, language_asm, NULL); |
| 1914 | } |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 | struct block_symbol |
| 1919 | lookup_language_this (const struct language_defn *lang, |
| 1920 | const struct block *block) |
| 1921 | { |
| 1922 | if (lang->la_name_of_this == NULL || block == NULL) |
| 1923 | return {}; |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 1926 | { |
| 1927 | struct objfile *objfile = lookup_objfile_from_block (block); |
| 1928 | |
| 1929 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 1930 | "lookup_language_this (%s, %s (objfile %s))", |
| 1931 | lang->la_name, host_address_to_string (block), |
| 1932 | objfile_debug_name (objfile)); |
| 1933 | } |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 | while (block) |
| 1936 | { |
| 1937 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 1938 | |
| 1939 | sym = block_lookup_symbol (block, lang->la_name_of_this, |
| 1940 | symbol_name_match_type::SEARCH_NAME, |
| 1941 | VAR_DOMAIN); |
| 1942 | if (sym != NULL) |
| 1943 | { |
| 1944 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 1945 | { |
| 1946 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = %s (%s, block %s)\n", |
| 1947 | SYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (sym), |
| 1948 | host_address_to_string (sym), |
| 1949 | host_address_to_string (block)); |
| 1950 | } |
| 1951 | return (struct block_symbol) {sym, block}; |
| 1952 | } |
| 1953 | if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (block)) |
| 1954 | break; |
| 1955 | block = BLOCK_SUPERBLOCK (block); |
| 1956 | } |
| 1957 | |
| 1958 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 1959 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = NULL\n"); |
| 1960 | return {}; |
| 1961 | } |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 | /* Given TYPE, a structure/union, |
| 1964 | return 1 if the component named NAME from the ultimate target |
| 1965 | structure/union is defined, otherwise, return 0. */ |
| 1966 | |
| 1967 | static int |
| 1968 | check_field (struct type *type, const char *name, |
| 1969 | struct field_of_this_result *is_a_field_of_this) |
| 1970 | { |
| 1971 | int i; |
| 1972 | |
| 1973 | /* The type may be a stub. */ |
| 1974 | type = check_typedef (type); |
| 1975 | |
| 1976 | for (i = TYPE_NFIELDS (type) - 1; i >= TYPE_N_BASECLASSES (type); i--) |
| 1977 | { |
| 1978 | const char *t_field_name = TYPE_FIELD_NAME (type, i); |
| 1979 | |
| 1980 | if (t_field_name && (strcmp_iw (t_field_name, name) == 0)) |
| 1981 | { |
| 1982 | is_a_field_of_this->type = type; |
| 1983 | is_a_field_of_this->field = &TYPE_FIELD (type, i); |
| 1984 | return 1; |
| 1985 | } |
| 1986 | } |
| 1987 | |
| 1988 | /* C++: If it was not found as a data field, then try to return it |
| 1989 | as a pointer to a method. */ |
| 1990 | |
| 1991 | for (i = TYPE_NFN_FIELDS (type) - 1; i >= 0; --i) |
| 1992 | { |
| 1993 | if (strcmp_iw (TYPE_FN_FIELDLIST_NAME (type, i), name) == 0) |
| 1994 | { |
| 1995 | is_a_field_of_this->type = type; |
| 1996 | is_a_field_of_this->fn_field = &TYPE_FN_FIELDLIST (type, i); |
| 1997 | return 1; |
| 1998 | } |
| 1999 | } |
| 2000 | |
| 2001 | for (i = TYPE_N_BASECLASSES (type) - 1; i >= 0; i--) |
| 2002 | if (check_field (TYPE_BASECLASS (type, i), name, is_a_field_of_this)) |
| 2003 | return 1; |
| 2004 | |
| 2005 | return 0; |
| 2006 | } |
| 2007 | |
| 2008 | /* Behave like lookup_symbol except that NAME is the natural name |
| 2009 | (e.g., demangled name) of the symbol that we're looking for. */ |
| 2010 | |
| 2011 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2012 | lookup_symbol_aux (const char *name, symbol_name_match_type match_type, |
| 2013 | const struct block *block, |
| 2014 | const domain_enum domain, enum language language, |
| 2015 | struct field_of_this_result *is_a_field_of_this) |
| 2016 | { |
| 2017 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2018 | const struct language_defn *langdef; |
| 2019 | |
| 2020 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2021 | { |
| 2022 | struct objfile *objfile = lookup_objfile_from_block (block); |
| 2023 | |
| 2024 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2025 | "lookup_symbol_aux (%s, %s (objfile %s), %s, %s)\n", |
| 2026 | name, host_address_to_string (block), |
| 2027 | objfile != NULL |
| 2028 | ? objfile_debug_name (objfile) : "NULL", |
| 2029 | domain_name (domain), language_str (language)); |
| 2030 | } |
| 2031 | |
| 2032 | /* Make sure we do something sensible with is_a_field_of_this, since |
| 2033 | the callers that set this parameter to some non-null value will |
| 2034 | certainly use it later. If we don't set it, the contents of |
| 2035 | is_a_field_of_this are undefined. */ |
| 2036 | if (is_a_field_of_this != NULL) |
| 2037 | memset (is_a_field_of_this, 0, sizeof (*is_a_field_of_this)); |
| 2038 | |
| 2039 | /* Search specified block and its superiors. Don't search |
| 2040 | STATIC_BLOCK or GLOBAL_BLOCK. */ |
| 2041 | |
| 2042 | result = lookup_local_symbol (name, match_type, block, domain, language); |
| 2043 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2044 | { |
| 2045 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2046 | { |
| 2047 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, "lookup_symbol_aux (...) = %s\n", |
| 2048 | host_address_to_string (result.symbol)); |
| 2049 | } |
| 2050 | return result; |
| 2051 | } |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | /* If requested to do so by the caller and if appropriate for LANGUAGE, |
| 2054 | check to see if NAME is a field of `this'. */ |
| 2055 | |
| 2056 | langdef = language_def (language); |
| 2057 | |
| 2058 | /* Don't do this check if we are searching for a struct. It will |
| 2059 | not be found by check_field, but will be found by other |
| 2060 | means. */ |
| 2061 | if (is_a_field_of_this != NULL && domain != STRUCT_DOMAIN) |
| 2062 | { |
| 2063 | result = lookup_language_this (langdef, block); |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 | if (result.symbol) |
| 2066 | { |
| 2067 | struct type *t = result.symbol->type; |
| 2068 | |
| 2069 | /* I'm not really sure that type of this can ever |
| 2070 | be typedefed; just be safe. */ |
| 2071 | t = check_typedef (t); |
| 2072 | if (TYPE_CODE (t) == TYPE_CODE_PTR || TYPE_IS_REFERENCE (t)) |
| 2073 | t = TYPE_TARGET_TYPE (t); |
| 2074 | |
| 2075 | if (TYPE_CODE (t) != TYPE_CODE_STRUCT |
| 2076 | && TYPE_CODE (t) != TYPE_CODE_UNION) |
| 2077 | error (_("Internal error: `%s' is not an aggregate"), |
| 2078 | langdef->la_name_of_this); |
| 2079 | |
| 2080 | if (check_field (t, name, is_a_field_of_this)) |
| 2081 | { |
| 2082 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2083 | { |
| 2084 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2085 | "lookup_symbol_aux (...) = NULL\n"); |
| 2086 | } |
| 2087 | return {}; |
| 2088 | } |
| 2089 | } |
| 2090 | } |
| 2091 | |
| 2092 | /* Now do whatever is appropriate for LANGUAGE to look |
| 2093 | up static and global variables. */ |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 | result = langdef->la_lookup_symbol_nonlocal (langdef, name, block, domain); |
| 2096 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2097 | { |
| 2098 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2099 | { |
| 2100 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, "lookup_symbol_aux (...) = %s\n", |
| 2101 | host_address_to_string (result.symbol)); |
| 2102 | } |
| 2103 | return result; |
| 2104 | } |
| 2105 | |
| 2106 | /* Now search all static file-level symbols. Not strictly correct, |
| 2107 | but more useful than an error. */ |
| 2108 | |
| 2109 | result = lookup_static_symbol (name, domain); |
| 2110 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2111 | { |
| 2112 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, "lookup_symbol_aux (...) = %s\n", |
| 2113 | result.symbol != NULL |
| 2114 | ? host_address_to_string (result.symbol) |
| 2115 | : "NULL"); |
| 2116 | } |
| 2117 | return result; |
| 2118 | } |
| 2119 | |
| 2120 | /* Check to see if the symbol is defined in BLOCK or its superiors. |
| 2121 | Don't search STATIC_BLOCK or GLOBAL_BLOCK. */ |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2124 | lookup_local_symbol (const char *name, |
| 2125 | symbol_name_match_type match_type, |
| 2126 | const struct block *block, |
| 2127 | const domain_enum domain, |
| 2128 | enum language language) |
| 2129 | { |
| 2130 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2131 | const struct block *static_block = block_static_block (block); |
| 2132 | const char *scope = block_scope (block); |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 | /* Check if either no block is specified or it's a global block. */ |
| 2135 | |
| 2136 | if (static_block == NULL) |
| 2137 | return {}; |
| 2138 | |
| 2139 | while (block != static_block) |
| 2140 | { |
| 2141 | sym = lookup_symbol_in_block (name, match_type, block, domain); |
| 2142 | if (sym != NULL) |
| 2143 | return (struct block_symbol) {sym, block}; |
| 2144 | |
| 2145 | if (language == language_cplus || language == language_fortran) |
| 2146 | { |
| 2147 | struct block_symbol blocksym |
| 2148 | = cp_lookup_symbol_imports_or_template (scope, name, block, |
| 2149 | domain); |
| 2150 | |
| 2151 | if (blocksym.symbol != NULL) |
| 2152 | return blocksym; |
| 2153 | } |
| 2154 | |
| 2155 | if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (block) != NULL && block_inlined_p (block)) |
| 2156 | break; |
| 2157 | block = BLOCK_SUPERBLOCK (block); |
| 2158 | } |
| 2159 | |
| 2160 | /* We've reached the end of the function without finding a result. */ |
| 2161 | |
| 2162 | return {}; |
| 2163 | } |
| 2164 | |
| 2165 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 | struct objfile * |
| 2168 | lookup_objfile_from_block (const struct block *block) |
| 2169 | { |
| 2170 | if (block == NULL) |
| 2171 | return NULL; |
| 2172 | |
| 2173 | block = block_global_block (block); |
| 2174 | /* Look through all blockvectors. */ |
| 2175 | for (objfile *obj : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2176 | { |
| 2177 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : obj->compunits ()) |
| 2178 | if (block == BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust), |
| 2179 | GLOBAL_BLOCK)) |
| 2180 | { |
| 2181 | if (obj->separate_debug_objfile_backlink) |
| 2182 | obj = obj->separate_debug_objfile_backlink; |
| 2183 | |
| 2184 | return obj; |
| 2185 | } |
| 2186 | } |
| 2187 | |
| 2188 | return NULL; |
| 2189 | } |
| 2190 | |
| 2191 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2192 | |
| 2193 | struct symbol * |
| 2194 | lookup_symbol_in_block (const char *name, symbol_name_match_type match_type, |
| 2195 | const struct block *block, |
| 2196 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2197 | { |
| 2198 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2201 | { |
| 2202 | struct objfile *objfile = lookup_objfile_from_block (block); |
| 2203 | |
| 2204 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2205 | "lookup_symbol_in_block (%s, %s (objfile %s), %s)", |
| 2206 | name, host_address_to_string (block), |
| 2207 | objfile_debug_name (objfile), |
| 2208 | domain_name (domain)); |
| 2209 | } |
| 2210 | |
| 2211 | sym = block_lookup_symbol (block, name, match_type, domain); |
| 2212 | if (sym) |
| 2213 | { |
| 2214 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2215 | { |
| 2216 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = %s\n", |
| 2217 | host_address_to_string (sym)); |
| 2218 | } |
| 2219 | return fixup_symbol_section (sym, NULL); |
| 2220 | } |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2223 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = NULL\n"); |
| 2224 | return NULL; |
| 2225 | } |
| 2226 | |
| 2227 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | struct block_symbol |
| 2230 | lookup_global_symbol_from_objfile (struct objfile *main_objfile, |
| 2231 | enum block_enum block_index, |
| 2232 | const char *name, |
| 2233 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2234 | { |
| 2235 | gdb_assert (block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK || block_index == STATIC_BLOCK); |
| 2236 | |
| 2237 | for (objfile *objfile : main_objfile->separate_debug_objfiles ()) |
| 2238 | { |
| 2239 | struct block_symbol result |
| 2240 | = lookup_symbol_in_objfile (objfile, block_index, name, domain); |
| 2241 | |
| 2242 | if (result.symbol != nullptr) |
| 2243 | return result; |
| 2244 | } |
| 2245 | |
| 2246 | return {}; |
| 2247 | } |
| 2248 | |
| 2249 | /* Check to see if the symbol is defined in one of the OBJFILE's |
| 2250 | symtabs. BLOCK_INDEX should be either GLOBAL_BLOCK or STATIC_BLOCK, |
| 2251 | depending on whether or not we want to search global symbols or |
| 2252 | static symbols. */ |
| 2253 | |
| 2254 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2255 | lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2256 | enum block_enum block_index, const char *name, |
| 2257 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2258 | { |
| 2259 | gdb_assert (block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK || block_index == STATIC_BLOCK); |
| 2260 | |
| 2261 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2262 | { |
| 2263 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2264 | "lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs (%s, %s, %s, %s)", |
| 2265 | objfile_debug_name (objfile), |
| 2266 | block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK |
| 2267 | ? "GLOBAL_BLOCK" : "STATIC_BLOCK", |
| 2268 | name, domain_name (domain)); |
| 2269 | } |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 2272 | { |
| 2273 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 2274 | const struct block *block; |
| 2275 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2276 | |
| 2277 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 2278 | block = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, block_index); |
| 2279 | result.symbol = block_lookup_symbol_primary (block, name, domain); |
| 2280 | result.block = block; |
| 2281 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2282 | { |
| 2283 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2284 | { |
| 2285 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = %s (block %s)\n", |
| 2286 | host_address_to_string (result.symbol), |
| 2287 | host_address_to_string (block)); |
| 2288 | } |
| 2289 | result.symbol = fixup_symbol_section (result.symbol, objfile); |
| 2290 | return result; |
| 2291 | |
| 2292 | } |
| 2293 | } |
| 2294 | |
| 2295 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2296 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, " = NULL\n"); |
| 2297 | return {}; |
| 2298 | } |
| 2299 | |
| 2300 | /* Wrapper around lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs for search_symbols. |
| 2301 | Look up LINKAGE_NAME in DOMAIN in the global and static blocks of OBJFILE |
| 2302 | and all associated separate debug objfiles. |
| 2303 | |
| 2304 | Normally we only look in OBJFILE, and not any separate debug objfiles |
| 2305 | because the outer loop will cause them to be searched too. This case is |
| 2306 | different. Here we're called from search_symbols where it will only |
| 2307 | call us for the objfile that contains a matching minsym. */ |
| 2308 | |
| 2309 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2310 | lookup_symbol_in_objfile_from_linkage_name (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2311 | const char *linkage_name, |
| 2312 | domain_enum domain) |
| 2313 | { |
| 2314 | enum language lang = current_language->la_language; |
| 2315 | struct objfile *main_objfile; |
| 2316 | |
| 2317 | demangle_result_storage storage; |
| 2318 | const char *modified_name = demangle_for_lookup (linkage_name, lang, storage); |
| 2319 | |
| 2320 | if (objfile->separate_debug_objfile_backlink) |
| 2321 | main_objfile = objfile->separate_debug_objfile_backlink; |
| 2322 | else |
| 2323 | main_objfile = objfile; |
| 2324 | |
| 2325 | for (::objfile *cur_objfile : main_objfile->separate_debug_objfiles ()) |
| 2326 | { |
| 2327 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2328 | |
| 2329 | result = lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs (cur_objfile, GLOBAL_BLOCK, |
| 2330 | modified_name, domain); |
| 2331 | if (result.symbol == NULL) |
| 2332 | result = lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs (cur_objfile, STATIC_BLOCK, |
| 2333 | modified_name, domain); |
| 2334 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2335 | return result; |
| 2336 | } |
| 2337 | |
| 2338 | return {}; |
| 2339 | } |
| 2340 | |
| 2341 | /* A helper function that throws an exception when a symbol was found |
| 2342 | in a psymtab but not in a symtab. */ |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 | static void ATTRIBUTE_NORETURN |
| 2345 | error_in_psymtab_expansion (enum block_enum block_index, const char *name, |
| 2346 | struct compunit_symtab *cust) |
| 2347 | { |
| 2348 | error (_("\ |
| 2349 | Internal: %s symbol `%s' found in %s psymtab but not in symtab.\n\ |
| 2350 | %s may be an inlined function, or may be a template function\n \ |
| 2351 | (if a template, try specifying an instantiation: %s<type>)."), |
| 2352 | block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK ? "global" : "static", |
| 2353 | name, |
| 2354 | symtab_to_filename_for_display (compunit_primary_filetab (cust)), |
| 2355 | name, name); |
| 2356 | } |
| 2357 | |
| 2358 | /* A helper function for various lookup routines that interfaces with |
| 2359 | the "quick" symbol table functions. */ |
| 2360 | |
| 2361 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2362 | lookup_symbol_via_quick_fns (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2363 | enum block_enum block_index, const char *name, |
| 2364 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2365 | { |
| 2366 | struct compunit_symtab *cust; |
| 2367 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 2368 | const struct block *block; |
| 2369 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2370 | |
| 2371 | if (!objfile->sf) |
| 2372 | return {}; |
| 2373 | |
| 2374 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2375 | { |
| 2376 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2377 | "lookup_symbol_via_quick_fns (%s, %s, %s, %s)\n", |
| 2378 | objfile_debug_name (objfile), |
| 2379 | block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK |
| 2380 | ? "GLOBAL_BLOCK" : "STATIC_BLOCK", |
| 2381 | name, domain_name (domain)); |
| 2382 | } |
| 2383 | |
| 2384 | cust = objfile->sf->qf->lookup_symbol (objfile, block_index, name, domain); |
| 2385 | if (cust == NULL) |
| 2386 | { |
| 2387 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2388 | { |
| 2389 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2390 | "lookup_symbol_via_quick_fns (...) = NULL\n"); |
| 2391 | } |
| 2392 | return {}; |
| 2393 | } |
| 2394 | |
| 2395 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 2396 | block = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, block_index); |
| 2397 | result.symbol = block_lookup_symbol (block, name, |
| 2398 | symbol_name_match_type::FULL, domain); |
| 2399 | if (result.symbol == NULL) |
| 2400 | error_in_psymtab_expansion (block_index, name, cust); |
| 2401 | |
| 2402 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 2403 | { |
| 2404 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2405 | "lookup_symbol_via_quick_fns (...) = %s (block %s)\n", |
| 2406 | host_address_to_string (result.symbol), |
| 2407 | host_address_to_string (block)); |
| 2408 | } |
| 2409 | |
| 2410 | result.symbol = fixup_symbol_section (result.symbol, objfile); |
| 2411 | result.block = block; |
| 2412 | return result; |
| 2413 | } |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2416 | |
| 2417 | struct block_symbol |
| 2418 | basic_lookup_symbol_nonlocal (const struct language_defn *langdef, |
| 2419 | const char *name, |
| 2420 | const struct block *block, |
| 2421 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2422 | { |
| 2423 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2424 | |
| 2425 | /* NOTE: dje/2014-10-26: The lookup in all objfiles search could skip |
| 2426 | the current objfile. Searching the current objfile first is useful |
| 2427 | for both matching user expectations as well as performance. */ |
| 2428 | |
| 2429 | result = lookup_symbol_in_static_block (name, block, domain); |
| 2430 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2431 | return result; |
| 2432 | |
| 2433 | /* If we didn't find a definition for a builtin type in the static block, |
| 2434 | search for it now. This is actually the right thing to do and can be |
| 2435 | a massive performance win. E.g., when debugging a program with lots of |
| 2436 | shared libraries we could search all of them only to find out the |
| 2437 | builtin type isn't defined in any of them. This is common for types |
| 2438 | like "void". */ |
| 2439 | if (domain == VAR_DOMAIN) |
| 2440 | { |
| 2441 | struct gdbarch *gdbarch; |
| 2442 | |
| 2443 | if (block == NULL) |
| 2444 | gdbarch = target_gdbarch (); |
| 2445 | else |
| 2446 | gdbarch = block_gdbarch (block); |
| 2447 | result.symbol = language_lookup_primitive_type_as_symbol (langdef, |
| 2448 | gdbarch, name); |
| 2449 | result.block = NULL; |
| 2450 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2451 | return result; |
| 2452 | } |
| 2453 | |
| 2454 | return lookup_global_symbol (name, block, domain); |
| 2455 | } |
| 2456 | |
| 2457 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2458 | |
| 2459 | struct block_symbol |
| 2460 | lookup_symbol_in_static_block (const char *name, |
| 2461 | const struct block *block, |
| 2462 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2463 | { |
| 2464 | const struct block *static_block = block_static_block (block); |
| 2465 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2466 | |
| 2467 | if (static_block == NULL) |
| 2468 | return {}; |
| 2469 | |
| 2470 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2471 | { |
| 2472 | struct objfile *objfile = lookup_objfile_from_block (static_block); |
| 2473 | |
| 2474 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2475 | "lookup_symbol_in_static_block (%s, %s (objfile %s)," |
| 2476 | " %s)\n", |
| 2477 | name, |
| 2478 | host_address_to_string (block), |
| 2479 | objfile_debug_name (objfile), |
| 2480 | domain_name (domain)); |
| 2481 | } |
| 2482 | |
| 2483 | sym = lookup_symbol_in_block (name, |
| 2484 | symbol_name_match_type::FULL, |
| 2485 | static_block, domain); |
| 2486 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2487 | { |
| 2488 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2489 | "lookup_symbol_in_static_block (...) = %s\n", |
| 2490 | sym != NULL ? host_address_to_string (sym) : "NULL"); |
| 2491 | } |
| 2492 | return (struct block_symbol) {sym, static_block}; |
| 2493 | } |
| 2494 | |
| 2495 | /* Perform the standard symbol lookup of NAME in OBJFILE: |
| 2496 | 1) First search expanded symtabs, and if not found |
| 2497 | 2) Search the "quick" symtabs (partial or .gdb_index). |
| 2498 | BLOCK_INDEX is one of GLOBAL_BLOCK or STATIC_BLOCK. */ |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2501 | lookup_symbol_in_objfile (struct objfile *objfile, enum block_enum block_index, |
| 2502 | const char *name, const domain_enum domain) |
| 2503 | { |
| 2504 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2505 | |
| 2506 | gdb_assert (block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK || block_index == STATIC_BLOCK); |
| 2507 | |
| 2508 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2509 | { |
| 2510 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2511 | "lookup_symbol_in_objfile (%s, %s, %s, %s)\n", |
| 2512 | objfile_debug_name (objfile), |
| 2513 | block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK |
| 2514 | ? "GLOBAL_BLOCK" : "STATIC_BLOCK", |
| 2515 | name, domain_name (domain)); |
| 2516 | } |
| 2517 | |
| 2518 | result = lookup_symbol_in_objfile_symtabs (objfile, block_index, |
| 2519 | name, domain); |
| 2520 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2521 | { |
| 2522 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2523 | { |
| 2524 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2525 | "lookup_symbol_in_objfile (...) = %s" |
| 2526 | " (in symtabs)\n", |
| 2527 | host_address_to_string (result.symbol)); |
| 2528 | } |
| 2529 | return result; |
| 2530 | } |
| 2531 | |
| 2532 | result = lookup_symbol_via_quick_fns (objfile, block_index, |
| 2533 | name, domain); |
| 2534 | if (symbol_lookup_debug) |
| 2535 | { |
| 2536 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 2537 | "lookup_symbol_in_objfile (...) = %s%s\n", |
| 2538 | result.symbol != NULL |
| 2539 | ? host_address_to_string (result.symbol) |
| 2540 | : "NULL", |
| 2541 | result.symbol != NULL ? " (via quick fns)" : ""); |
| 2542 | } |
| 2543 | return result; |
| 2544 | } |
| 2545 | |
| 2546 | /* Private data to be used with lookup_symbol_global_iterator_cb. */ |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 | struct global_or_static_sym_lookup_data |
| 2549 | { |
| 2550 | /* The name of the symbol we are searching for. */ |
| 2551 | const char *name; |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 | /* The domain to use for our search. */ |
| 2554 | domain_enum domain; |
| 2555 | |
| 2556 | /* The block index in which to search. */ |
| 2557 | enum block_enum block_index; |
| 2558 | |
| 2559 | /* The field where the callback should store the symbol if found. |
| 2560 | It should be initialized to {NULL, NULL} before the search is started. */ |
| 2561 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2562 | }; |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 | /* A callback function for gdbarch_iterate_over_objfiles_in_search_order. |
| 2565 | It searches by name for a symbol in the block given by BLOCK_INDEX of the |
| 2566 | given OBJFILE. The arguments for the search are passed via CB_DATA, which |
| 2567 | in reality is a pointer to struct global_or_static_sym_lookup_data. */ |
| 2568 | |
| 2569 | static int |
| 2570 | lookup_symbol_global_or_static_iterator_cb (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2571 | void *cb_data) |
| 2572 | { |
| 2573 | struct global_or_static_sym_lookup_data *data = |
| 2574 | (struct global_or_static_sym_lookup_data *) cb_data; |
| 2575 | |
| 2576 | gdb_assert (data->result.symbol == NULL |
| 2577 | && data->result.block == NULL); |
| 2578 | |
| 2579 | data->result = lookup_symbol_in_objfile (objfile, data->block_index, |
| 2580 | data->name, data->domain); |
| 2581 | |
| 2582 | /* If we found a match, tell the iterator to stop. Otherwise, |
| 2583 | keep going. */ |
| 2584 | return (data->result.symbol != NULL); |
| 2585 | } |
| 2586 | |
| 2587 | /* This function contains the common code of lookup_{global,static}_symbol. |
| 2588 | OBJFILE is only used if BLOCK_INDEX is GLOBAL_SCOPE, in which case it is |
| 2589 | the objfile to start the lookup in. */ |
| 2590 | |
| 2591 | static struct block_symbol |
| 2592 | lookup_global_or_static_symbol (const char *name, |
| 2593 | enum block_enum block_index, |
| 2594 | struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2595 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2596 | { |
| 2597 | struct symbol_cache *cache = get_symbol_cache (current_program_space); |
| 2598 | struct block_symbol result; |
| 2599 | struct global_or_static_sym_lookup_data lookup_data; |
| 2600 | struct block_symbol_cache *bsc; |
| 2601 | struct symbol_cache_slot *slot; |
| 2602 | |
| 2603 | gdb_assert (block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK || block_index == STATIC_BLOCK); |
| 2604 | gdb_assert (objfile == nullptr || block_index == GLOBAL_BLOCK); |
| 2605 | |
| 2606 | /* First see if we can find the symbol in the cache. |
| 2607 | This works because we use the current objfile to qualify the lookup. */ |
| 2608 | result = symbol_cache_lookup (cache, objfile, block_index, name, domain, |
| 2609 | &bsc, &slot); |
| 2610 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2611 | { |
| 2612 | if (SYMBOL_LOOKUP_FAILED_P (result)) |
| 2613 | return {}; |
| 2614 | return result; |
| 2615 | } |
| 2616 | |
| 2617 | /* Do a global search (of global blocks, heh). */ |
| 2618 | if (result.symbol == NULL) |
| 2619 | { |
| 2620 | memset (&lookup_data, 0, sizeof (lookup_data)); |
| 2621 | lookup_data.name = name; |
| 2622 | lookup_data.block_index = block_index; |
| 2623 | lookup_data.domain = domain; |
| 2624 | gdbarch_iterate_over_objfiles_in_search_order |
| 2625 | (objfile != NULL ? get_objfile_arch (objfile) : target_gdbarch (), |
| 2626 | lookup_symbol_global_or_static_iterator_cb, &lookup_data, objfile); |
| 2627 | result = lookup_data.result; |
| 2628 | } |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 | if (result.symbol != NULL) |
| 2631 | symbol_cache_mark_found (bsc, slot, objfile, result.symbol, result.block); |
| 2632 | else |
| 2633 | symbol_cache_mark_not_found (bsc, slot, objfile, name, domain); |
| 2634 | |
| 2635 | return result; |
| 2636 | } |
| 2637 | |
| 2638 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2639 | |
| 2640 | struct block_symbol |
| 2641 | lookup_static_symbol (const char *name, const domain_enum domain) |
| 2642 | { |
| 2643 | return lookup_global_or_static_symbol (name, STATIC_BLOCK, nullptr, domain); |
| 2644 | } |
| 2645 | |
| 2646 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2647 | |
| 2648 | struct block_symbol |
| 2649 | lookup_global_symbol (const char *name, |
| 2650 | const struct block *block, |
| 2651 | const domain_enum domain) |
| 2652 | { |
| 2653 | /* If a block was passed in, we want to search the corresponding |
| 2654 | global block first. This yields "more expected" behavior, and is |
| 2655 | needed to support 'FILENAME'::VARIABLE lookups. */ |
| 2656 | const struct block *global_block = block_global_block (block); |
| 2657 | if (global_block != nullptr) |
| 2658 | { |
| 2659 | symbol *sym = lookup_symbol_in_block (name, |
| 2660 | symbol_name_match_type::FULL, |
| 2661 | global_block, domain); |
| 2662 | if (sym != nullptr) |
| 2663 | return { sym, global_block }; |
| 2664 | } |
| 2665 | |
| 2666 | struct objfile *objfile = lookup_objfile_from_block (block); |
| 2667 | return lookup_global_or_static_symbol (name, GLOBAL_BLOCK, objfile, domain); |
| 2668 | } |
| 2669 | |
| 2670 | bool |
| 2671 | symbol_matches_domain (enum language symbol_language, |
| 2672 | domain_enum symbol_domain, |
| 2673 | domain_enum domain) |
| 2674 | { |
| 2675 | /* For C++ "struct foo { ... }" also defines a typedef for "foo". |
| 2676 | Similarly, any Ada type declaration implicitly defines a typedef. */ |
| 2677 | if (symbol_language == language_cplus |
| 2678 | || symbol_language == language_d |
| 2679 | || symbol_language == language_ada |
| 2680 | || symbol_language == language_rust) |
| 2681 | { |
| 2682 | if ((domain == VAR_DOMAIN || domain == STRUCT_DOMAIN) |
| 2683 | && symbol_domain == STRUCT_DOMAIN) |
| 2684 | return true; |
| 2685 | } |
| 2686 | /* For all other languages, strict match is required. */ |
| 2687 | return (symbol_domain == domain); |
| 2688 | } |
| 2689 | |
| 2690 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2691 | |
| 2692 | struct type * |
| 2693 | lookup_transparent_type (const char *name) |
| 2694 | { |
| 2695 | return current_language->la_lookup_transparent_type (name); |
| 2696 | } |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 | /* A helper for basic_lookup_transparent_type that interfaces with the |
| 2699 | "quick" symbol table functions. */ |
| 2700 | |
| 2701 | static struct type * |
| 2702 | basic_lookup_transparent_type_quick (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2703 | enum block_enum block_index, |
| 2704 | const char *name) |
| 2705 | { |
| 2706 | struct compunit_symtab *cust; |
| 2707 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 2708 | const struct block *block; |
| 2709 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2710 | |
| 2711 | if (!objfile->sf) |
| 2712 | return NULL; |
| 2713 | cust = objfile->sf->qf->lookup_symbol (objfile, block_index, name, |
| 2714 | STRUCT_DOMAIN); |
| 2715 | if (cust == NULL) |
| 2716 | return NULL; |
| 2717 | |
| 2718 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 2719 | block = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, block_index); |
| 2720 | sym = block_find_symbol (block, name, STRUCT_DOMAIN, |
| 2721 | block_find_non_opaque_type, NULL); |
| 2722 | if (sym == NULL) |
| 2723 | error_in_psymtab_expansion (block_index, name, cust); |
| 2724 | gdb_assert (!TYPE_IS_OPAQUE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym))); |
| 2725 | return SYMBOL_TYPE (sym); |
| 2726 | } |
| 2727 | |
| 2728 | /* Subroutine of basic_lookup_transparent_type to simplify it. |
| 2729 | Look up the non-opaque definition of NAME in BLOCK_INDEX of OBJFILE. |
| 2730 | BLOCK_INDEX is either GLOBAL_BLOCK or STATIC_BLOCK. */ |
| 2731 | |
| 2732 | static struct type * |
| 2733 | basic_lookup_transparent_type_1 (struct objfile *objfile, |
| 2734 | enum block_enum block_index, |
| 2735 | const char *name) |
| 2736 | { |
| 2737 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 2738 | const struct block *block; |
| 2739 | const struct symbol *sym; |
| 2740 | |
| 2741 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 2742 | { |
| 2743 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 2744 | block = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, block_index); |
| 2745 | sym = block_find_symbol (block, name, STRUCT_DOMAIN, |
| 2746 | block_find_non_opaque_type, NULL); |
| 2747 | if (sym != NULL) |
| 2748 | { |
| 2749 | gdb_assert (!TYPE_IS_OPAQUE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym))); |
| 2750 | return SYMBOL_TYPE (sym); |
| 2751 | } |
| 2752 | } |
| 2753 | |
| 2754 | return NULL; |
| 2755 | } |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 | /* The standard implementation of lookup_transparent_type. This code |
| 2758 | was modeled on lookup_symbol -- the parts not relevant to looking |
| 2759 | up types were just left out. In particular it's assumed here that |
| 2760 | types are available in STRUCT_DOMAIN and only in file-static or |
| 2761 | global blocks. */ |
| 2762 | |
| 2763 | struct type * |
| 2764 | basic_lookup_transparent_type (const char *name) |
| 2765 | { |
| 2766 | struct type *t; |
| 2767 | |
| 2768 | /* Now search all the global symbols. Do the symtab's first, then |
| 2769 | check the psymtab's. If a psymtab indicates the existence |
| 2770 | of the desired name as a global, then do psymtab-to-symtab |
| 2771 | conversion on the fly and return the found symbol. */ |
| 2772 | |
| 2773 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2774 | { |
| 2775 | t = basic_lookup_transparent_type_1 (objfile, GLOBAL_BLOCK, name); |
| 2776 | if (t) |
| 2777 | return t; |
| 2778 | } |
| 2779 | |
| 2780 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2781 | { |
| 2782 | t = basic_lookup_transparent_type_quick (objfile, GLOBAL_BLOCK, name); |
| 2783 | if (t) |
| 2784 | return t; |
| 2785 | } |
| 2786 | |
| 2787 | /* Now search the static file-level symbols. |
| 2788 | Not strictly correct, but more useful than an error. |
| 2789 | Do the symtab's first, then |
| 2790 | check the psymtab's. If a psymtab indicates the existence |
| 2791 | of the desired name as a file-level static, then do psymtab-to-symtab |
| 2792 | conversion on the fly and return the found symbol. */ |
| 2793 | |
| 2794 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2795 | { |
| 2796 | t = basic_lookup_transparent_type_1 (objfile, STATIC_BLOCK, name); |
| 2797 | if (t) |
| 2798 | return t; |
| 2799 | } |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2802 | { |
| 2803 | t = basic_lookup_transparent_type_quick (objfile, STATIC_BLOCK, name); |
| 2804 | if (t) |
| 2805 | return t; |
| 2806 | } |
| 2807 | |
| 2808 | return (struct type *) 0; |
| 2809 | } |
| 2810 | |
| 2811 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2812 | |
| 2813 | bool |
| 2814 | iterate_over_symbols (const struct block *block, |
| 2815 | const lookup_name_info &name, |
| 2816 | const domain_enum domain, |
| 2817 | gdb::function_view<symbol_found_callback_ftype> callback) |
| 2818 | { |
| 2819 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 2820 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2821 | |
| 2822 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS_WITH_NAME (block, name, iter, sym) |
| 2823 | { |
| 2824 | if (symbol_matches_domain (SYMBOL_LANGUAGE (sym), |
| 2825 | SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym), domain)) |
| 2826 | { |
| 2827 | struct block_symbol block_sym = {sym, block}; |
| 2828 | |
| 2829 | if (!callback (&block_sym)) |
| 2830 | return false; |
| 2831 | } |
| 2832 | } |
| 2833 | return true; |
| 2834 | } |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2837 | |
| 2838 | bool |
| 2839 | iterate_over_symbols_terminated |
| 2840 | (const struct block *block, |
| 2841 | const lookup_name_info &name, |
| 2842 | const domain_enum domain, |
| 2843 | gdb::function_view<symbol_found_callback_ftype> callback) |
| 2844 | { |
| 2845 | if (!iterate_over_symbols (block, name, domain, callback)) |
| 2846 | return false; |
| 2847 | struct block_symbol block_sym = {nullptr, block}; |
| 2848 | return callback (&block_sym); |
| 2849 | } |
| 2850 | |
| 2851 | /* Find the compunit symtab associated with PC and SECTION. |
| 2852 | This will read in debug info as necessary. */ |
| 2853 | |
| 2854 | struct compunit_symtab * |
| 2855 | find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (CORE_ADDR pc, struct obj_section *section) |
| 2856 | { |
| 2857 | struct compunit_symtab *best_cust = NULL; |
| 2858 | CORE_ADDR distance = 0; |
| 2859 | struct bound_minimal_symbol msymbol; |
| 2860 | |
| 2861 | /* If we know that this is not a text address, return failure. This is |
| 2862 | necessary because we loop based on the block's high and low code |
| 2863 | addresses, which do not include the data ranges, and because |
| 2864 | we call find_pc_sect_psymtab which has a similar restriction based |
| 2865 | on the partial_symtab's texthigh and textlow. */ |
| 2866 | msymbol = lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_section (pc, section); |
| 2867 | if (msymbol.minsym && msymbol.minsym->data_p ()) |
| 2868 | return NULL; |
| 2869 | |
| 2870 | /* Search all symtabs for the one whose file contains our address, and which |
| 2871 | is the smallest of all the ones containing the address. This is designed |
| 2872 | to deal with a case like symtab a is at 0x1000-0x2000 and 0x3000-0x4000 |
| 2873 | and symtab b is at 0x2000-0x3000. So the GLOBAL_BLOCK for a is from |
| 2874 | 0x1000-0x4000, but for address 0x2345 we want to return symtab b. |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 | This happens for native ecoff format, where code from included files |
| 2877 | gets its own symtab. The symtab for the included file should have |
| 2878 | been read in already via the dependency mechanism. |
| 2879 | It might be swifter to create several symtabs with the same name |
| 2880 | like xcoff does (I'm not sure). |
| 2881 | |
| 2882 | It also happens for objfiles that have their functions reordered. |
| 2883 | For these, the symtab we are looking for is not necessarily read in. */ |
| 2884 | |
| 2885 | for (objfile *obj_file : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2886 | { |
| 2887 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : obj_file->compunits ()) |
| 2888 | { |
| 2889 | const struct block *b; |
| 2890 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 2891 | |
| 2892 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 2893 | b = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, GLOBAL_BLOCK); |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 | if (BLOCK_START (b) <= pc |
| 2896 | && BLOCK_END (b) > pc |
| 2897 | && (distance == 0 |
| 2898 | || BLOCK_END (b) - BLOCK_START (b) < distance)) |
| 2899 | { |
| 2900 | /* For an objfile that has its functions reordered, |
| 2901 | find_pc_psymtab will find the proper partial symbol table |
| 2902 | and we simply return its corresponding symtab. */ |
| 2903 | /* In order to better support objfiles that contain both |
| 2904 | stabs and coff debugging info, we continue on if a psymtab |
| 2905 | can't be found. */ |
| 2906 | if ((obj_file->flags & OBJF_REORDERED) && obj_file->sf) |
| 2907 | { |
| 2908 | struct compunit_symtab *result; |
| 2909 | |
| 2910 | result |
| 2911 | = obj_file->sf->qf->find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (obj_file, |
| 2912 | msymbol, |
| 2913 | pc, |
| 2914 | section, |
| 2915 | 0); |
| 2916 | if (result != NULL) |
| 2917 | return result; |
| 2918 | } |
| 2919 | if (section != 0) |
| 2920 | { |
| 2921 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 2922 | struct symbol *sym = NULL; |
| 2923 | |
| 2924 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (b, iter, sym) |
| 2925 | { |
| 2926 | fixup_symbol_section (sym, obj_file); |
| 2927 | if (matching_obj_sections (SYMBOL_OBJ_SECTION (obj_file, |
| 2928 | sym), |
| 2929 | section)) |
| 2930 | break; |
| 2931 | } |
| 2932 | if (sym == NULL) |
| 2933 | continue; /* No symbol in this symtab matches |
| 2934 | section. */ |
| 2935 | } |
| 2936 | distance = BLOCK_END (b) - BLOCK_START (b); |
| 2937 | best_cust = cust; |
| 2938 | } |
| 2939 | } |
| 2940 | } |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 | if (best_cust != NULL) |
| 2943 | return best_cust; |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 | /* Not found in symtabs, search the "quick" symtabs (e.g. psymtabs). */ |
| 2946 | |
| 2947 | for (objfile *objf : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2948 | { |
| 2949 | struct compunit_symtab *result; |
| 2950 | |
| 2951 | if (!objf->sf) |
| 2952 | continue; |
| 2953 | result = objf->sf->qf->find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (objf, |
| 2954 | msymbol, |
| 2955 | pc, section, |
| 2956 | 1); |
| 2957 | if (result != NULL) |
| 2958 | return result; |
| 2959 | } |
| 2960 | |
| 2961 | return NULL; |
| 2962 | } |
| 2963 | |
| 2964 | /* Find the compunit symtab associated with PC. |
| 2965 | This will read in debug info as necessary. |
| 2966 | Backward compatibility, no section. */ |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 | struct compunit_symtab * |
| 2969 | find_pc_compunit_symtab (CORE_ADDR pc) |
| 2970 | { |
| 2971 | return find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (pc, find_pc_mapped_section (pc)); |
| 2972 | } |
| 2973 | |
| 2974 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 2975 | |
| 2976 | struct symbol * |
| 2977 | find_symbol_at_address (CORE_ADDR address) |
| 2978 | { |
| 2979 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 2980 | { |
| 2981 | if (objfile->sf == NULL |
| 2982 | || objfile->sf->qf->find_compunit_symtab_by_address == NULL) |
| 2983 | continue; |
| 2984 | |
| 2985 | struct compunit_symtab *symtab |
| 2986 | = objfile->sf->qf->find_compunit_symtab_by_address (objfile, address); |
| 2987 | if (symtab != NULL) |
| 2988 | { |
| 2989 | const struct blockvector *bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (symtab); |
| 2990 | |
| 2991 | for (int i = GLOBAL_BLOCK; i <= STATIC_BLOCK; ++i) |
| 2992 | { |
| 2993 | const struct block *b = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, i); |
| 2994 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 2995 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 2996 | |
| 2997 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (b, iter, sym) |
| 2998 | { |
| 2999 | if (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_STATIC |
| 3000 | && SYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (sym) == address) |
| 3001 | return sym; |
| 3002 | } |
| 3003 | } |
| 3004 | } |
| 3005 | } |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 | return NULL; |
| 3008 | } |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 | \f |
| 3011 | |
| 3012 | /* Find the source file and line number for a given PC value and SECTION. |
| 3013 | Return a structure containing a symtab pointer, a line number, |
| 3014 | and a pc range for the entire source line. |
| 3015 | The value's .pc field is NOT the specified pc. |
| 3016 | NOTCURRENT nonzero means, if specified pc is on a line boundary, |
| 3017 | use the line that ends there. Otherwise, in that case, the line |
| 3018 | that begins there is used. */ |
| 3019 | |
| 3020 | /* The big complication here is that a line may start in one file, and end just |
| 3021 | before the start of another file. This usually occurs when you #include |
| 3022 | code in the middle of a subroutine. To properly find the end of a line's PC |
| 3023 | range, we must search all symtabs associated with this compilation unit, and |
| 3024 | find the one whose first PC is closer than that of the next line in this |
| 3025 | symtab. */ |
| 3026 | |
| 3027 | struct symtab_and_line |
| 3028 | find_pc_sect_line (CORE_ADDR pc, struct obj_section *section, int notcurrent) |
| 3029 | { |
| 3030 | struct compunit_symtab *cust; |
| 3031 | struct linetable *l; |
| 3032 | int len; |
| 3033 | struct linetable_entry *item; |
| 3034 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 3035 | struct bound_minimal_symbol msymbol; |
| 3036 | |
| 3037 | /* Info on best line seen so far, and where it starts, and its file. */ |
| 3038 | |
| 3039 | struct linetable_entry *best = NULL; |
| 3040 | CORE_ADDR best_end = 0; |
| 3041 | struct symtab *best_symtab = 0; |
| 3042 | |
| 3043 | /* Store here the first line number |
| 3044 | of a file which contains the line at the smallest pc after PC. |
| 3045 | If we don't find a line whose range contains PC, |
| 3046 | we will use a line one less than this, |
| 3047 | with a range from the start of that file to the first line's pc. */ |
| 3048 | struct linetable_entry *alt = NULL; |
| 3049 | |
| 3050 | /* Info on best line seen in this file. */ |
| 3051 | |
| 3052 | struct linetable_entry *prev; |
| 3053 | |
| 3054 | /* If this pc is not from the current frame, |
| 3055 | it is the address of the end of a call instruction. |
| 3056 | Quite likely that is the start of the following statement. |
| 3057 | But what we want is the statement containing the instruction. |
| 3058 | Fudge the pc to make sure we get that. */ |
| 3059 | |
| 3060 | /* It's tempting to assume that, if we can't find debugging info for |
| 3061 | any function enclosing PC, that we shouldn't search for line |
| 3062 | number info, either. However, GAS can emit line number info for |
| 3063 | assembly files --- very helpful when debugging hand-written |
| 3064 | assembly code. In such a case, we'd have no debug info for the |
| 3065 | function, but we would have line info. */ |
| 3066 | |
| 3067 | if (notcurrent) |
| 3068 | pc -= 1; |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 | /* elz: added this because this function returned the wrong |
| 3071 | information if the pc belongs to a stub (import/export) |
| 3072 | to call a shlib function. This stub would be anywhere between |
| 3073 | two functions in the target, and the line info was erroneously |
| 3074 | taken to be the one of the line before the pc. */ |
| 3075 | |
| 3076 | /* RT: Further explanation: |
| 3077 | |
| 3078 | * We have stubs (trampolines) inserted between procedures. |
| 3079 | * |
| 3080 | * Example: "shr1" exists in a shared library, and a "shr1" stub also |
| 3081 | * exists in the main image. |
| 3082 | * |
| 3083 | * In the minimal symbol table, we have a bunch of symbols |
| 3084 | * sorted by start address. The stubs are marked as "trampoline", |
| 3085 | * the others appear as text. E.g.: |
| 3086 | * |
| 3087 | * Minimal symbol table for main image |
| 3088 | * main: code for main (text symbol) |
| 3089 | * shr1: stub (trampoline symbol) |
| 3090 | * foo: code for foo (text symbol) |
| 3091 | * ... |
| 3092 | * Minimal symbol table for "shr1" image: |
| 3093 | * ... |
| 3094 | * shr1: code for shr1 (text symbol) |
| 3095 | * ... |
| 3096 | * |
| 3097 | * So the code below is trying to detect if we are in the stub |
| 3098 | * ("shr1" stub), and if so, find the real code ("shr1" trampoline), |
| 3099 | * and if found, do the symbolization from the real-code address |
| 3100 | * rather than the stub address. |
| 3101 | * |
| 3102 | * Assumptions being made about the minimal symbol table: |
| 3103 | * 1. lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc() will return a trampoline only |
| 3104 | * if we're really in the trampoline.s If we're beyond it (say |
| 3105 | * we're in "foo" in the above example), it'll have a closer |
| 3106 | * symbol (the "foo" text symbol for example) and will not |
| 3107 | * return the trampoline. |
| 3108 | * 2. lookup_minimal_symbol_text() will find a real text symbol |
| 3109 | * corresponding to the trampoline, and whose address will |
| 3110 | * be different than the trampoline address. I put in a sanity |
| 3111 | * check for the address being the same, to avoid an |
| 3112 | * infinite recursion. |
| 3113 | */ |
| 3114 | msymbol = lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc (pc); |
| 3115 | if (msymbol.minsym != NULL) |
| 3116 | if (MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol.minsym) == mst_solib_trampoline) |
| 3117 | { |
| 3118 | struct bound_minimal_symbol mfunsym |
| 3119 | = lookup_minimal_symbol_text (MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol.minsym), |
| 3120 | NULL); |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 | if (mfunsym.minsym == NULL) |
| 3123 | /* I eliminated this warning since it is coming out |
| 3124 | * in the following situation: |
| 3125 | * gdb shmain // test program with shared libraries |
| 3126 | * (gdb) break shr1 // function in shared lib |
| 3127 | * Warning: In stub for ... |
| 3128 | * In the above situation, the shared lib is not loaded yet, |
| 3129 | * so of course we can't find the real func/line info, |
| 3130 | * but the "break" still works, and the warning is annoying. |
| 3131 | * So I commented out the warning. RT */ |
| 3132 | /* warning ("In stub for %s; unable to find real function/line info", |
| 3133 | SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol)); */ |
| 3134 | ; |
| 3135 | /* fall through */ |
| 3136 | else if (BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (mfunsym) |
| 3137 | == BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (msymbol)) |
| 3138 | /* Avoid infinite recursion */ |
| 3139 | /* See above comment about why warning is commented out. */ |
| 3140 | /* warning ("In stub for %s; unable to find real function/line info", |
| 3141 | SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol)); */ |
| 3142 | ; |
| 3143 | /* fall through */ |
| 3144 | else |
| 3145 | return find_pc_line (BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (mfunsym), 0); |
| 3146 | } |
| 3147 | |
| 3148 | symtab_and_line val; |
| 3149 | val.pspace = current_program_space; |
| 3150 | |
| 3151 | cust = find_pc_sect_compunit_symtab (pc, section); |
| 3152 | if (cust == NULL) |
| 3153 | { |
| 3154 | /* If no symbol information, return previous pc. */ |
| 3155 | if (notcurrent) |
| 3156 | pc++; |
| 3157 | val.pc = pc; |
| 3158 | return val; |
| 3159 | } |
| 3160 | |
| 3161 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 3162 | |
| 3163 | /* Look at all the symtabs that share this blockvector. |
| 3164 | They all have the same apriori range, that we found was right; |
| 3165 | but they have different line tables. */ |
| 3166 | |
| 3167 | for (symtab *iter_s : compunit_filetabs (cust)) |
| 3168 | { |
| 3169 | /* Find the best line in this symtab. */ |
| 3170 | l = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (iter_s); |
| 3171 | if (!l) |
| 3172 | continue; |
| 3173 | len = l->nitems; |
| 3174 | if (len <= 0) |
| 3175 | { |
| 3176 | /* I think len can be zero if the symtab lacks line numbers |
| 3177 | (e.g. gcc -g1). (Either that or the LINETABLE is NULL; |
| 3178 | I'm not sure which, and maybe it depends on the symbol |
| 3179 | reader). */ |
| 3180 | continue; |
| 3181 | } |
| 3182 | |
| 3183 | prev = NULL; |
| 3184 | item = l->item; /* Get first line info. */ |
| 3185 | |
| 3186 | /* Is this file's first line closer than the first lines of other files? |
| 3187 | If so, record this file, and its first line, as best alternate. */ |
| 3188 | if (item->pc > pc && (!alt || item->pc < alt->pc)) |
| 3189 | alt = item; |
| 3190 | |
| 3191 | auto pc_compare = [](const CORE_ADDR & comp_pc, |
| 3192 | const struct linetable_entry & lhs)->bool |
| 3193 | { |
| 3194 | return comp_pc < lhs.pc; |
| 3195 | }; |
| 3196 | |
| 3197 | struct linetable_entry *first = item; |
| 3198 | struct linetable_entry *last = item + len; |
| 3199 | item = std::upper_bound (first, last, pc, pc_compare); |
| 3200 | if (item != first) |
| 3201 | prev = item - 1; /* Found a matching item. */ |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 | /* At this point, prev points at the line whose start addr is <= pc, and |
| 3204 | item points at the next line. If we ran off the end of the linetable |
| 3205 | (pc >= start of the last line), then prev == item. If pc < start of |
| 3206 | the first line, prev will not be set. */ |
| 3207 | |
| 3208 | /* Is this file's best line closer than the best in the other files? |
| 3209 | If so, record this file, and its best line, as best so far. Don't |
| 3210 | save prev if it represents the end of a function (i.e. line number |
| 3211 | 0) instead of a real line. */ |
| 3212 | |
| 3213 | if (prev && prev->line && (!best || prev->pc > best->pc)) |
| 3214 | { |
| 3215 | best = prev; |
| 3216 | best_symtab = iter_s; |
| 3217 | |
| 3218 | /* Discard BEST_END if it's before the PC of the current BEST. */ |
| 3219 | if (best_end <= best->pc) |
| 3220 | best_end = 0; |
| 3221 | } |
| 3222 | |
| 3223 | /* If another line (denoted by ITEM) is in the linetable and its |
| 3224 | PC is after BEST's PC, but before the current BEST_END, then |
| 3225 | use ITEM's PC as the new best_end. */ |
| 3226 | if (best && item < last && item->pc > best->pc |
| 3227 | && (best_end == 0 || best_end > item->pc)) |
| 3228 | best_end = item->pc; |
| 3229 | } |
| 3230 | |
| 3231 | if (!best_symtab) |
| 3232 | { |
| 3233 | /* If we didn't find any line number info, just return zeros. |
| 3234 | We used to return alt->line - 1 here, but that could be |
| 3235 | anywhere; if we don't have line number info for this PC, |
| 3236 | don't make some up. */ |
| 3237 | val.pc = pc; |
| 3238 | } |
| 3239 | else if (best->line == 0) |
| 3240 | { |
| 3241 | /* If our best fit is in a range of PC's for which no line |
| 3242 | number info is available (line number is zero) then we didn't |
| 3243 | find any valid line information. */ |
| 3244 | val.pc = pc; |
| 3245 | } |
| 3246 | else |
| 3247 | { |
| 3248 | val.symtab = best_symtab; |
| 3249 | val.line = best->line; |
| 3250 | val.pc = best->pc; |
| 3251 | if (best_end && (!alt || best_end < alt->pc)) |
| 3252 | val.end = best_end; |
| 3253 | else if (alt) |
| 3254 | val.end = alt->pc; |
| 3255 | else |
| 3256 | val.end = BLOCK_END (BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, GLOBAL_BLOCK)); |
| 3257 | } |
| 3258 | val.section = section; |
| 3259 | return val; |
| 3260 | } |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 | /* Backward compatibility (no section). */ |
| 3263 | |
| 3264 | struct symtab_and_line |
| 3265 | find_pc_line (CORE_ADDR pc, int notcurrent) |
| 3266 | { |
| 3267 | struct obj_section *section; |
| 3268 | |
| 3269 | section = find_pc_overlay (pc); |
| 3270 | if (pc_in_unmapped_range (pc, section)) |
| 3271 | pc = overlay_mapped_address (pc, section); |
| 3272 | return find_pc_sect_line (pc, section, notcurrent); |
| 3273 | } |
| 3274 | |
| 3275 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 3276 | |
| 3277 | struct symtab * |
| 3278 | find_pc_line_symtab (CORE_ADDR pc) |
| 3279 | { |
| 3280 | struct symtab_and_line sal; |
| 3281 | |
| 3282 | /* This always passes zero for NOTCURRENT to find_pc_line. |
| 3283 | There are currently no callers that ever pass non-zero. */ |
| 3284 | sal = find_pc_line (pc, 0); |
| 3285 | return sal.symtab; |
| 3286 | } |
| 3287 | \f |
| 3288 | /* Find line number LINE in any symtab whose name is the same as |
| 3289 | SYMTAB. |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 | If found, return the symtab that contains the linetable in which it was |
| 3292 | found, set *INDEX to the index in the linetable of the best entry |
| 3293 | found, and set *EXACT_MATCH to true if the value returned is an |
| 3294 | exact match. |
| 3295 | |
| 3296 | If not found, return NULL. */ |
| 3297 | |
| 3298 | struct symtab * |
| 3299 | find_line_symtab (struct symtab *sym_tab, int line, |
| 3300 | int *index, bool *exact_match) |
| 3301 | { |
| 3302 | int exact = 0; /* Initialized here to avoid a compiler warning. */ |
| 3303 | |
| 3304 | /* BEST_INDEX and BEST_LINETABLE identify the smallest linenumber > LINE |
| 3305 | so far seen. */ |
| 3306 | |
| 3307 | int best_index; |
| 3308 | struct linetable *best_linetable; |
| 3309 | struct symtab *best_symtab; |
| 3310 | |
| 3311 | /* First try looking it up in the given symtab. */ |
| 3312 | best_linetable = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (sym_tab); |
| 3313 | best_symtab = sym_tab; |
| 3314 | best_index = find_line_common (best_linetable, line, &exact, 0); |
| 3315 | if (best_index < 0 || !exact) |
| 3316 | { |
| 3317 | /* Didn't find an exact match. So we better keep looking for |
| 3318 | another symtab with the same name. In the case of xcoff, |
| 3319 | multiple csects for one source file (produced by IBM's FORTRAN |
| 3320 | compiler) produce multiple symtabs (this is unavoidable |
| 3321 | assuming csects can be at arbitrary places in memory and that |
| 3322 | the GLOBAL_BLOCK of a symtab has a begin and end address). */ |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 | /* BEST is the smallest linenumber > LINE so far seen, |
| 3325 | or 0 if none has been seen so far. |
| 3326 | BEST_INDEX and BEST_LINETABLE identify the item for it. */ |
| 3327 | int best; |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 | if (best_index >= 0) |
| 3330 | best = best_linetable->item[best_index].line; |
| 3331 | else |
| 3332 | best = 0; |
| 3333 | |
| 3334 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 3335 | { |
| 3336 | if (objfile->sf) |
| 3337 | objfile->sf->qf->expand_symtabs_with_fullname |
| 3338 | (objfile, symtab_to_fullname (sym_tab)); |
| 3339 | } |
| 3340 | |
| 3341 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 3342 | { |
| 3343 | for (compunit_symtab *cu : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 3344 | { |
| 3345 | for (symtab *s : compunit_filetabs (cu)) |
| 3346 | { |
| 3347 | struct linetable *l; |
| 3348 | int ind; |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | if (FILENAME_CMP (sym_tab->filename, s->filename) != 0) |
| 3351 | continue; |
| 3352 | if (FILENAME_CMP (symtab_to_fullname (sym_tab), |
| 3353 | symtab_to_fullname (s)) != 0) |
| 3354 | continue; |
| 3355 | l = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (s); |
| 3356 | ind = find_line_common (l, line, &exact, 0); |
| 3357 | if (ind >= 0) |
| 3358 | { |
| 3359 | if (exact) |
| 3360 | { |
| 3361 | best_index = ind; |
| 3362 | best_linetable = l; |
| 3363 | best_symtab = s; |
| 3364 | goto done; |
| 3365 | } |
| 3366 | if (best == 0 || l->item[ind].line < best) |
| 3367 | { |
| 3368 | best = l->item[ind].line; |
| 3369 | best_index = ind; |
| 3370 | best_linetable = l; |
| 3371 | best_symtab = s; |
| 3372 | } |
| 3373 | } |
| 3374 | } |
| 3375 | } |
| 3376 | } |
| 3377 | } |
| 3378 | done: |
| 3379 | if (best_index < 0) |
| 3380 | return NULL; |
| 3381 | |
| 3382 | if (index) |
| 3383 | *index = best_index; |
| 3384 | if (exact_match) |
| 3385 | *exact_match = (exact != 0); |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 | return best_symtab; |
| 3388 | } |
| 3389 | |
| 3390 | /* Given SYMTAB, returns all the PCs function in the symtab that |
| 3391 | exactly match LINE. Returns an empty vector if there are no exact |
| 3392 | matches, but updates BEST_ITEM in this case. */ |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 | std::vector<CORE_ADDR> |
| 3395 | find_pcs_for_symtab_line (struct symtab *symtab, int line, |
| 3396 | struct linetable_entry **best_item) |
| 3397 | { |
| 3398 | int start = 0; |
| 3399 | std::vector<CORE_ADDR> result; |
| 3400 | |
| 3401 | /* First, collect all the PCs that are at this line. */ |
| 3402 | while (1) |
| 3403 | { |
| 3404 | int was_exact; |
| 3405 | int idx; |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 | idx = find_line_common (SYMTAB_LINETABLE (symtab), line, &was_exact, |
| 3408 | start); |
| 3409 | if (idx < 0) |
| 3410 | break; |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 | if (!was_exact) |
| 3413 | { |
| 3414 | struct linetable_entry *item = &SYMTAB_LINETABLE (symtab)->item[idx]; |
| 3415 | |
| 3416 | if (*best_item == NULL || item->line < (*best_item)->line) |
| 3417 | *best_item = item; |
| 3418 | |
| 3419 | break; |
| 3420 | } |
| 3421 | |
| 3422 | result.push_back (SYMTAB_LINETABLE (symtab)->item[idx].pc); |
| 3423 | start = idx + 1; |
| 3424 | } |
| 3425 | |
| 3426 | return result; |
| 3427 | } |
| 3428 | |
| 3429 | \f |
| 3430 | /* Set the PC value for a given source file and line number and return true. |
| 3431 | Returns false for invalid line number (and sets the PC to 0). |
| 3432 | The source file is specified with a struct symtab. */ |
| 3433 | |
| 3434 | bool |
| 3435 | find_line_pc (struct symtab *symtab, int line, CORE_ADDR *pc) |
| 3436 | { |
| 3437 | struct linetable *l; |
| 3438 | int ind; |
| 3439 | |
| 3440 | *pc = 0; |
| 3441 | if (symtab == 0) |
| 3442 | return false; |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 | symtab = find_line_symtab (symtab, line, &ind, NULL); |
| 3445 | if (symtab != NULL) |
| 3446 | { |
| 3447 | l = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (symtab); |
| 3448 | *pc = l->item[ind].pc; |
| 3449 | return true; |
| 3450 | } |
| 3451 | else |
| 3452 | return false; |
| 3453 | } |
| 3454 | |
| 3455 | /* Find the range of pc values in a line. |
| 3456 | Store the starting pc of the line into *STARTPTR |
| 3457 | and the ending pc (start of next line) into *ENDPTR. |
| 3458 | Returns true to indicate success. |
| 3459 | Returns false if could not find the specified line. */ |
| 3460 | |
| 3461 | bool |
| 3462 | find_line_pc_range (struct symtab_and_line sal, CORE_ADDR *startptr, |
| 3463 | CORE_ADDR *endptr) |
| 3464 | { |
| 3465 | CORE_ADDR startaddr; |
| 3466 | struct symtab_and_line found_sal; |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 | startaddr = sal.pc; |
| 3469 | if (startaddr == 0 && !find_line_pc (sal.symtab, sal.line, &startaddr)) |
| 3470 | return false; |
| 3471 | |
| 3472 | /* This whole function is based on address. For example, if line 10 has |
| 3473 | two parts, one from 0x100 to 0x200 and one from 0x300 to 0x400, then |
| 3474 | "info line *0x123" should say the line goes from 0x100 to 0x200 |
| 3475 | and "info line *0x355" should say the line goes from 0x300 to 0x400. |
| 3476 | This also insures that we never give a range like "starts at 0x134 |
| 3477 | and ends at 0x12c". */ |
| 3478 | |
| 3479 | found_sal = find_pc_sect_line (startaddr, sal.section, 0); |
| 3480 | if (found_sal.line != sal.line) |
| 3481 | { |
| 3482 | /* The specified line (sal) has zero bytes. */ |
| 3483 | *startptr = found_sal.pc; |
| 3484 | *endptr = found_sal.pc; |
| 3485 | } |
| 3486 | else |
| 3487 | { |
| 3488 | *startptr = found_sal.pc; |
| 3489 | *endptr = found_sal.end; |
| 3490 | } |
| 3491 | return true; |
| 3492 | } |
| 3493 | |
| 3494 | /* Given a line table and a line number, return the index into the line |
| 3495 | table for the pc of the nearest line whose number is >= the specified one. |
| 3496 | Return -1 if none is found. The value is >= 0 if it is an index. |
| 3497 | START is the index at which to start searching the line table. |
| 3498 | |
| 3499 | Set *EXACT_MATCH nonzero if the value returned is an exact match. */ |
| 3500 | |
| 3501 | static int |
| 3502 | find_line_common (struct linetable *l, int lineno, |
| 3503 | int *exact_match, int start) |
| 3504 | { |
| 3505 | int i; |
| 3506 | int len; |
| 3507 | |
| 3508 | /* BEST is the smallest linenumber > LINENO so far seen, |
| 3509 | or 0 if none has been seen so far. |
| 3510 | BEST_INDEX identifies the item for it. */ |
| 3511 | |
| 3512 | int best_index = -1; |
| 3513 | int best = 0; |
| 3514 | |
| 3515 | *exact_match = 0; |
| 3516 | |
| 3517 | if (lineno <= 0) |
| 3518 | return -1; |
| 3519 | if (l == 0) |
| 3520 | return -1; |
| 3521 | |
| 3522 | len = l->nitems; |
| 3523 | for (i = start; i < len; i++) |
| 3524 | { |
| 3525 | struct linetable_entry *item = &(l->item[i]); |
| 3526 | |
| 3527 | if (item->line == lineno) |
| 3528 | { |
| 3529 | /* Return the first (lowest address) entry which matches. */ |
| 3530 | *exact_match = 1; |
| 3531 | return i; |
| 3532 | } |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 | if (item->line > lineno && (best == 0 || item->line < best)) |
| 3535 | { |
| 3536 | best = item->line; |
| 3537 | best_index = i; |
| 3538 | } |
| 3539 | } |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 | /* If we got here, we didn't get an exact match. */ |
| 3542 | return best_index; |
| 3543 | } |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 | bool |
| 3546 | find_pc_line_pc_range (CORE_ADDR pc, CORE_ADDR *startptr, CORE_ADDR *endptr) |
| 3547 | { |
| 3548 | struct symtab_and_line sal; |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | sal = find_pc_line (pc, 0); |
| 3551 | *startptr = sal.pc; |
| 3552 | *endptr = sal.end; |
| 3553 | return sal.symtab != 0; |
| 3554 | } |
| 3555 | |
| 3556 | /* Helper for find_function_start_sal. Does most of the work, except |
| 3557 | setting the sal's symbol. */ |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 | static symtab_and_line |
| 3560 | find_function_start_sal_1 (CORE_ADDR func_addr, obj_section *section, |
| 3561 | bool funfirstline) |
| 3562 | { |
| 3563 | symtab_and_line sal = find_pc_sect_line (func_addr, section, 0); |
| 3564 | |
| 3565 | if (funfirstline && sal.symtab != NULL |
| 3566 | && (COMPUNIT_LOCATIONS_VALID (SYMTAB_COMPUNIT (sal.symtab)) |
| 3567 | || SYMTAB_LANGUAGE (sal.symtab) == language_asm)) |
| 3568 | { |
| 3569 | struct gdbarch *gdbarch = get_objfile_arch (SYMTAB_OBJFILE (sal.symtab)); |
| 3570 | |
| 3571 | sal.pc = func_addr; |
| 3572 | if (gdbarch_skip_entrypoint_p (gdbarch)) |
| 3573 | sal.pc = gdbarch_skip_entrypoint (gdbarch, sal.pc); |
| 3574 | return sal; |
| 3575 | } |
| 3576 | |
| 3577 | /* We always should have a line for the function start address. |
| 3578 | If we don't, something is odd. Create a plain SAL referring |
| 3579 | just the PC and hope that skip_prologue_sal (if requested) |
| 3580 | can find a line number for after the prologue. */ |
| 3581 | if (sal.pc < func_addr) |
| 3582 | { |
| 3583 | sal = {}; |
| 3584 | sal.pspace = current_program_space; |
| 3585 | sal.pc = func_addr; |
| 3586 | sal.section = section; |
| 3587 | } |
| 3588 | |
| 3589 | if (funfirstline) |
| 3590 | skip_prologue_sal (&sal); |
| 3591 | |
| 3592 | return sal; |
| 3593 | } |
| 3594 | |
| 3595 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 3596 | |
| 3597 | symtab_and_line |
| 3598 | find_function_start_sal (CORE_ADDR func_addr, obj_section *section, |
| 3599 | bool funfirstline) |
| 3600 | { |
| 3601 | symtab_and_line sal |
| 3602 | = find_function_start_sal_1 (func_addr, section, funfirstline); |
| 3603 | |
| 3604 | /* find_function_start_sal_1 does a linetable search, so it finds |
| 3605 | the symtab and linenumber, but not a symbol. Fill in the |
| 3606 | function symbol too. */ |
| 3607 | sal.symbol = find_pc_sect_containing_function (sal.pc, sal.section); |
| 3608 | |
| 3609 | return sal; |
| 3610 | } |
| 3611 | |
| 3612 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 3613 | |
| 3614 | symtab_and_line |
| 3615 | find_function_start_sal (symbol *sym, bool funfirstline) |
| 3616 | { |
| 3617 | fixup_symbol_section (sym, NULL); |
| 3618 | symtab_and_line sal |
| 3619 | = find_function_start_sal_1 (BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)), |
| 3620 | SYMBOL_OBJ_SECTION (symbol_objfile (sym), sym), |
| 3621 | funfirstline); |
| 3622 | sal.symbol = sym; |
| 3623 | return sal; |
| 3624 | } |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 | |
| 3627 | /* Given a function start address FUNC_ADDR and SYMTAB, find the first |
| 3628 | address for that function that has an entry in SYMTAB's line info |
| 3629 | table. If such an entry cannot be found, return FUNC_ADDR |
| 3630 | unaltered. */ |
| 3631 | |
| 3632 | static CORE_ADDR |
| 3633 | skip_prologue_using_lineinfo (CORE_ADDR func_addr, struct symtab *symtab) |
| 3634 | { |
| 3635 | CORE_ADDR func_start, func_end; |
| 3636 | struct linetable *l; |
| 3637 | int i; |
| 3638 | |
| 3639 | /* Give up if this symbol has no lineinfo table. */ |
| 3640 | l = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (symtab); |
| 3641 | if (l == NULL) |
| 3642 | return func_addr; |
| 3643 | |
| 3644 | /* Get the range for the function's PC values, or give up if we |
| 3645 | cannot, for some reason. */ |
| 3646 | if (!find_pc_partial_function (func_addr, NULL, &func_start, &func_end)) |
| 3647 | return func_addr; |
| 3648 | |
| 3649 | /* Linetable entries are ordered by PC values, see the commentary in |
| 3650 | symtab.h where `struct linetable' is defined. Thus, the first |
| 3651 | entry whose PC is in the range [FUNC_START..FUNC_END[ is the |
| 3652 | address we are looking for. */ |
| 3653 | for (i = 0; i < l->nitems; i++) |
| 3654 | { |
| 3655 | struct linetable_entry *item = &(l->item[i]); |
| 3656 | |
| 3657 | /* Don't use line numbers of zero, they mark special entries in |
| 3658 | the table. See the commentary on symtab.h before the |
| 3659 | definition of struct linetable. */ |
| 3660 | if (item->line > 0 && func_start <= item->pc && item->pc < func_end) |
| 3661 | return item->pc; |
| 3662 | } |
| 3663 | |
| 3664 | return func_addr; |
| 3665 | } |
| 3666 | |
| 3667 | /* Adjust SAL to the first instruction past the function prologue. |
| 3668 | If the PC was explicitly specified, the SAL is not changed. |
| 3669 | If the line number was explicitly specified then the SAL can still be |
| 3670 | updated, unless the language for SAL is assembler, in which case the SAL |
| 3671 | will be left unchanged. |
| 3672 | If SAL is already past the prologue, then do nothing. */ |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 | void |
| 3675 | skip_prologue_sal (struct symtab_and_line *sal) |
| 3676 | { |
| 3677 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 3678 | struct symtab_and_line start_sal; |
| 3679 | CORE_ADDR pc, saved_pc; |
| 3680 | struct obj_section *section; |
| 3681 | const char *name; |
| 3682 | struct objfile *objfile; |
| 3683 | struct gdbarch *gdbarch; |
| 3684 | const struct block *b, *function_block; |
| 3685 | int force_skip, skip; |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 | /* Do not change the SAL if PC was specified explicitly. */ |
| 3688 | if (sal->explicit_pc) |
| 3689 | return; |
| 3690 | |
| 3691 | /* In assembly code, if the user asks for a specific line then we should |
| 3692 | not adjust the SAL. The user already has instruction level |
| 3693 | visibility in this case, so selecting a line other than one requested |
| 3694 | is likely to be the wrong choice. */ |
| 3695 | if (sal->symtab != nullptr |
| 3696 | && sal->explicit_line |
| 3697 | && SYMTAB_LANGUAGE (sal->symtab) == language_asm) |
| 3698 | return; |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 | scoped_restore_current_pspace_and_thread restore_pspace_thread; |
| 3701 | |
| 3702 | switch_to_program_space_and_thread (sal->pspace); |
| 3703 | |
| 3704 | sym = find_pc_sect_function (sal->pc, sal->section); |
| 3705 | if (sym != NULL) |
| 3706 | { |
| 3707 | fixup_symbol_section (sym, NULL); |
| 3708 | |
| 3709 | objfile = symbol_objfile (sym); |
| 3710 | pc = BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)); |
| 3711 | section = SYMBOL_OBJ_SECTION (objfile, sym); |
| 3712 | name = SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (sym); |
| 3713 | } |
| 3714 | else |
| 3715 | { |
| 3716 | struct bound_minimal_symbol msymbol |
| 3717 | = lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_section (sal->pc, sal->section); |
| 3718 | |
| 3719 | if (msymbol.minsym == NULL) |
| 3720 | return; |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 | objfile = msymbol.objfile; |
| 3723 | pc = BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (msymbol); |
| 3724 | section = MSYMBOL_OBJ_SECTION (objfile, msymbol.minsym); |
| 3725 | name = MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol.minsym); |
| 3726 | } |
| 3727 | |
| 3728 | gdbarch = get_objfile_arch (objfile); |
| 3729 | |
| 3730 | /* Process the prologue in two passes. In the first pass try to skip the |
| 3731 | prologue (SKIP is true) and verify there is a real need for it (indicated |
| 3732 | by FORCE_SKIP). If no such reason was found run a second pass where the |
| 3733 | prologue is not skipped (SKIP is false). */ |
| 3734 | |
| 3735 | skip = 1; |
| 3736 | force_skip = 1; |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 | /* Be conservative - allow direct PC (without skipping prologue) only if we |
| 3739 | have proven the CU (Compilation Unit) supports it. sal->SYMTAB does not |
| 3740 | have to be set by the caller so we use SYM instead. */ |
| 3741 | if (sym != NULL |
| 3742 | && COMPUNIT_LOCATIONS_VALID (SYMTAB_COMPUNIT (symbol_symtab (sym)))) |
| 3743 | force_skip = 0; |
| 3744 | |
| 3745 | saved_pc = pc; |
| 3746 | do |
| 3747 | { |
| 3748 | pc = saved_pc; |
| 3749 | |
| 3750 | /* If the function is in an unmapped overlay, use its unmapped LMA address, |
| 3751 | so that gdbarch_skip_prologue has something unique to work on. */ |
| 3752 | if (section_is_overlay (section) && !section_is_mapped (section)) |
| 3753 | pc = overlay_unmapped_address (pc, section); |
| 3754 | |
| 3755 | /* Skip "first line" of function (which is actually its prologue). */ |
| 3756 | pc += gdbarch_deprecated_function_start_offset (gdbarch); |
| 3757 | if (gdbarch_skip_entrypoint_p (gdbarch)) |
| 3758 | pc = gdbarch_skip_entrypoint (gdbarch, pc); |
| 3759 | if (skip) |
| 3760 | pc = gdbarch_skip_prologue_noexcept (gdbarch, pc); |
| 3761 | |
| 3762 | /* For overlays, map pc back into its mapped VMA range. */ |
| 3763 | pc = overlay_mapped_address (pc, section); |
| 3764 | |
| 3765 | /* Calculate line number. */ |
| 3766 | start_sal = find_pc_sect_line (pc, section, 0); |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 | /* Check if gdbarch_skip_prologue left us in mid-line, and the next |
| 3769 | line is still part of the same function. */ |
| 3770 | if (skip && start_sal.pc != pc |
| 3771 | && (sym ? (BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)) <= start_sal.end |
| 3772 | && start_sal.end < BLOCK_END (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym))) |
| 3773 | : (lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_section (start_sal.end, section).minsym |
| 3774 | == lookup_minimal_symbol_by_pc_section (pc, section).minsym))) |
| 3775 | { |
| 3776 | /* First pc of next line */ |
| 3777 | pc = start_sal.end; |
| 3778 | /* Recalculate the line number (might not be N+1). */ |
| 3779 | start_sal = find_pc_sect_line (pc, section, 0); |
| 3780 | } |
| 3781 | |
| 3782 | /* On targets with executable formats that don't have a concept of |
| 3783 | constructors (ELF with .init has, PE doesn't), gcc emits a call |
| 3784 | to `__main' in `main' between the prologue and before user |
| 3785 | code. */ |
| 3786 | if (gdbarch_skip_main_prologue_p (gdbarch) |
| 3787 | && name && strcmp_iw (name, "main") == 0) |
| 3788 | { |
| 3789 | pc = gdbarch_skip_main_prologue (gdbarch, pc); |
| 3790 | /* Recalculate the line number (might not be N+1). */ |
| 3791 | start_sal = find_pc_sect_line (pc, section, 0); |
| 3792 | force_skip = 1; |
| 3793 | } |
| 3794 | } |
| 3795 | while (!force_skip && skip--); |
| 3796 | |
| 3797 | /* If we still don't have a valid source line, try to find the first |
| 3798 | PC in the lineinfo table that belongs to the same function. This |
| 3799 | happens with COFF debug info, which does not seem to have an |
| 3800 | entry in lineinfo table for the code after the prologue which has |
| 3801 | no direct relation to source. For example, this was found to be |
| 3802 | the case with the DJGPP target using "gcc -gcoff" when the |
| 3803 | compiler inserted code after the prologue to make sure the stack |
| 3804 | is aligned. */ |
| 3805 | if (!force_skip && sym && start_sal.symtab == NULL) |
| 3806 | { |
| 3807 | pc = skip_prologue_using_lineinfo (pc, symbol_symtab (sym)); |
| 3808 | /* Recalculate the line number. */ |
| 3809 | start_sal = find_pc_sect_line (pc, section, 0); |
| 3810 | } |
| 3811 | |
| 3812 | /* If we're already past the prologue, leave SAL unchanged. Otherwise |
| 3813 | forward SAL to the end of the prologue. */ |
| 3814 | if (sal->pc >= pc) |
| 3815 | return; |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 | sal->pc = pc; |
| 3818 | sal->section = section; |
| 3819 | sal->symtab = start_sal.symtab; |
| 3820 | sal->line = start_sal.line; |
| 3821 | sal->end = start_sal.end; |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 | /* Check if we are now inside an inlined function. If we can, |
| 3824 | use the call site of the function instead. */ |
| 3825 | b = block_for_pc_sect (sal->pc, sal->section); |
| 3826 | function_block = NULL; |
| 3827 | while (b != NULL) |
| 3828 | { |
| 3829 | if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (b) != NULL && block_inlined_p (b)) |
| 3830 | function_block = b; |
| 3831 | else if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (b) != NULL) |
| 3832 | break; |
| 3833 | b = BLOCK_SUPERBLOCK (b); |
| 3834 | } |
| 3835 | if (function_block != NULL |
| 3836 | && SYMBOL_LINE (BLOCK_FUNCTION (function_block)) != 0) |
| 3837 | { |
| 3838 | sal->line = SYMBOL_LINE (BLOCK_FUNCTION (function_block)); |
| 3839 | sal->symtab = symbol_symtab (BLOCK_FUNCTION (function_block)); |
| 3840 | } |
| 3841 | } |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 | /* Given PC at the function's start address, attempt to find the |
| 3844 | prologue end using SAL information. Return zero if the skip fails. |
| 3845 | |
| 3846 | A non-optimized prologue traditionally has one SAL for the function |
| 3847 | and a second for the function body. A single line function has |
| 3848 | them both pointing at the same line. |
| 3849 | |
| 3850 | An optimized prologue is similar but the prologue may contain |
| 3851 | instructions (SALs) from the instruction body. Need to skip those |
| 3852 | while not getting into the function body. |
| 3853 | |
| 3854 | The functions end point and an increasing SAL line are used as |
| 3855 | indicators of the prologue's endpoint. |
| 3856 | |
| 3857 | This code is based on the function refine_prologue_limit |
| 3858 | (found in ia64). */ |
| 3859 | |
| 3860 | CORE_ADDR |
| 3861 | skip_prologue_using_sal (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, CORE_ADDR func_addr) |
| 3862 | { |
| 3863 | struct symtab_and_line prologue_sal; |
| 3864 | CORE_ADDR start_pc; |
| 3865 | CORE_ADDR end_pc; |
| 3866 | const struct block *bl; |
| 3867 | |
| 3868 | /* Get an initial range for the function. */ |
| 3869 | find_pc_partial_function (func_addr, NULL, &start_pc, &end_pc); |
| 3870 | start_pc += gdbarch_deprecated_function_start_offset (gdbarch); |
| 3871 | |
| 3872 | prologue_sal = find_pc_line (start_pc, 0); |
| 3873 | if (prologue_sal.line != 0) |
| 3874 | { |
| 3875 | /* For languages other than assembly, treat two consecutive line |
| 3876 | entries at the same address as a zero-instruction prologue. |
| 3877 | The GNU assembler emits separate line notes for each instruction |
| 3878 | in a multi-instruction macro, but compilers generally will not |
| 3879 | do this. */ |
| 3880 | if (prologue_sal.symtab->language != language_asm) |
| 3881 | { |
| 3882 | struct linetable *linetable = SYMTAB_LINETABLE (prologue_sal.symtab); |
| 3883 | int idx = 0; |
| 3884 | |
| 3885 | /* Skip any earlier lines, and any end-of-sequence marker |
| 3886 | from a previous function. */ |
| 3887 | while (linetable->item[idx].pc != prologue_sal.pc |
| 3888 | || linetable->item[idx].line == 0) |
| 3889 | idx++; |
| 3890 | |
| 3891 | if (idx+1 < linetable->nitems |
| 3892 | && linetable->item[idx+1].line != 0 |
| 3893 | && linetable->item[idx+1].pc == start_pc) |
| 3894 | return start_pc; |
| 3895 | } |
| 3896 | |
| 3897 | /* If there is only one sal that covers the entire function, |
| 3898 | then it is probably a single line function, like |
| 3899 | "foo(){}". */ |
| 3900 | if (prologue_sal.end >= end_pc) |
| 3901 | return 0; |
| 3902 | |
| 3903 | while (prologue_sal.end < end_pc) |
| 3904 | { |
| 3905 | struct symtab_and_line sal; |
| 3906 | |
| 3907 | sal = find_pc_line (prologue_sal.end, 0); |
| 3908 | if (sal.line == 0) |
| 3909 | break; |
| 3910 | /* Assume that a consecutive SAL for the same (or larger) |
| 3911 | line mark the prologue -> body transition. */ |
| 3912 | if (sal.line >= prologue_sal.line) |
| 3913 | break; |
| 3914 | /* Likewise if we are in a different symtab altogether |
| 3915 | (e.g. within a file included via #include). */ |
| 3916 | if (sal.symtab != prologue_sal.symtab) |
| 3917 | break; |
| 3918 | |
| 3919 | /* The line number is smaller. Check that it's from the |
| 3920 | same function, not something inlined. If it's inlined, |
| 3921 | then there is no point comparing the line numbers. */ |
| 3922 | bl = block_for_pc (prologue_sal.end); |
| 3923 | while (bl) |
| 3924 | { |
| 3925 | if (block_inlined_p (bl)) |
| 3926 | break; |
| 3927 | if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (bl)) |
| 3928 | { |
| 3929 | bl = NULL; |
| 3930 | break; |
| 3931 | } |
| 3932 | bl = BLOCK_SUPERBLOCK (bl); |
| 3933 | } |
| 3934 | if (bl != NULL) |
| 3935 | break; |
| 3936 | |
| 3937 | /* The case in which compiler's optimizer/scheduler has |
| 3938 | moved instructions into the prologue. We look ahead in |
| 3939 | the function looking for address ranges whose |
| 3940 | corresponding line number is less the first one that we |
| 3941 | found for the function. This is more conservative then |
| 3942 | refine_prologue_limit which scans a large number of SALs |
| 3943 | looking for any in the prologue. */ |
| 3944 | prologue_sal = sal; |
| 3945 | } |
| 3946 | } |
| 3947 | |
| 3948 | if (prologue_sal.end < end_pc) |
| 3949 | /* Return the end of this line, or zero if we could not find a |
| 3950 | line. */ |
| 3951 | return prologue_sal.end; |
| 3952 | else |
| 3953 | /* Don't return END_PC, which is past the end of the function. */ |
| 3954 | return prologue_sal.pc; |
| 3955 | } |
| 3956 | |
| 3957 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 3958 | |
| 3959 | symbol * |
| 3960 | find_function_alias_target (bound_minimal_symbol msymbol) |
| 3961 | { |
| 3962 | CORE_ADDR func_addr; |
| 3963 | if (!msymbol_is_function (msymbol.objfile, msymbol.minsym, &func_addr)) |
| 3964 | return NULL; |
| 3965 | |
| 3966 | symbol *sym = find_pc_function (func_addr); |
| 3967 | if (sym != NULL |
| 3968 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_BLOCK |
| 3969 | && BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)) == func_addr) |
| 3970 | return sym; |
| 3971 | |
| 3972 | return NULL; |
| 3973 | } |
| 3974 | |
| 3975 | \f |
| 3976 | /* If P is of the form "operator[ \t]+..." where `...' is |
| 3977 | some legitimate operator text, return a pointer to the |
| 3978 | beginning of the substring of the operator text. |
| 3979 | Otherwise, return "". */ |
| 3980 | |
| 3981 | static const char * |
| 3982 | operator_chars (const char *p, const char **end) |
| 3983 | { |
| 3984 | *end = ""; |
| 3985 | if (!startswith (p, CP_OPERATOR_STR)) |
| 3986 | return *end; |
| 3987 | p += CP_OPERATOR_LEN; |
| 3988 | |
| 3989 | /* Don't get faked out by `operator' being part of a longer |
| 3990 | identifier. */ |
| 3991 | if (isalpha (*p) || *p == '_' || *p == '$' || *p == '\0') |
| 3992 | return *end; |
| 3993 | |
| 3994 | /* Allow some whitespace between `operator' and the operator symbol. */ |
| 3995 | while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\t') |
| 3996 | p++; |
| 3997 | |
| 3998 | /* Recognize 'operator TYPENAME'. */ |
| 3999 | |
| 4000 | if (isalpha (*p) || *p == '_' || *p == '$') |
| 4001 | { |
| 4002 | const char *q = p + 1; |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 | while (isalnum (*q) || *q == '_' || *q == '$') |
| 4005 | q++; |
| 4006 | *end = q; |
| 4007 | return p; |
| 4008 | } |
| 4009 | |
| 4010 | while (*p) |
| 4011 | switch (*p) |
| 4012 | { |
| 4013 | case '\\': /* regexp quoting */ |
| 4014 | if (p[1] == '*') |
| 4015 | { |
| 4016 | if (p[2] == '=') /* 'operator\*=' */ |
| 4017 | *end = p + 3; |
| 4018 | else /* 'operator\*' */ |
| 4019 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4020 | return p; |
| 4021 | } |
| 4022 | else if (p[1] == '[') |
| 4023 | { |
| 4024 | if (p[2] == ']') |
| 4025 | error (_("mismatched quoting on brackets, " |
| 4026 | "try 'operator\\[\\]'")); |
| 4027 | else if (p[2] == '\\' && p[3] == ']') |
| 4028 | { |
| 4029 | *end = p + 4; /* 'operator\[\]' */ |
| 4030 | return p; |
| 4031 | } |
| 4032 | else |
| 4033 | error (_("nothing is allowed between '[' and ']'")); |
| 4034 | } |
| 4035 | else |
| 4036 | { |
| 4037 | /* Gratuitous quote: skip it and move on. */ |
| 4038 | p++; |
| 4039 | continue; |
| 4040 | } |
| 4041 | break; |
| 4042 | case '!': |
| 4043 | case '=': |
| 4044 | case '*': |
| 4045 | case '/': |
| 4046 | case '%': |
| 4047 | case '^': |
| 4048 | if (p[1] == '=') |
| 4049 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4050 | else |
| 4051 | *end = p + 1; |
| 4052 | return p; |
| 4053 | case '<': |
| 4054 | case '>': |
| 4055 | case '+': |
| 4056 | case '-': |
| 4057 | case '&': |
| 4058 | case '|': |
| 4059 | if (p[0] == '-' && p[1] == '>') |
| 4060 | { |
| 4061 | /* Struct pointer member operator 'operator->'. */ |
| 4062 | if (p[2] == '*') |
| 4063 | { |
| 4064 | *end = p + 3; /* 'operator->*' */ |
| 4065 | return p; |
| 4066 | } |
| 4067 | else if (p[2] == '\\') |
| 4068 | { |
| 4069 | *end = p + 4; /* Hopefully 'operator->\*' */ |
| 4070 | return p; |
| 4071 | } |
| 4072 | else |
| 4073 | { |
| 4074 | *end = p + 2; /* 'operator->' */ |
| 4075 | return p; |
| 4076 | } |
| 4077 | } |
| 4078 | if (p[1] == '=' || p[1] == p[0]) |
| 4079 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4080 | else |
| 4081 | *end = p + 1; |
| 4082 | return p; |
| 4083 | case '~': |
| 4084 | case ',': |
| 4085 | *end = p + 1; |
| 4086 | return p; |
| 4087 | case '(': |
| 4088 | if (p[1] != ')') |
| 4089 | error (_("`operator ()' must be specified " |
| 4090 | "without whitespace in `()'")); |
| 4091 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4092 | return p; |
| 4093 | case '?': |
| 4094 | if (p[1] != ':') |
| 4095 | error (_("`operator ?:' must be specified " |
| 4096 | "without whitespace in `?:'")); |
| 4097 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4098 | return p; |
| 4099 | case '[': |
| 4100 | if (p[1] != ']') |
| 4101 | error (_("`operator []' must be specified " |
| 4102 | "without whitespace in `[]'")); |
| 4103 | *end = p + 2; |
| 4104 | return p; |
| 4105 | default: |
| 4106 | error (_("`operator %s' not supported"), p); |
| 4107 | break; |
| 4108 | } |
| 4109 | |
| 4110 | *end = ""; |
| 4111 | return *end; |
| 4112 | } |
| 4113 | \f |
| 4114 | |
| 4115 | /* What part to match in a file name. */ |
| 4116 | |
| 4117 | struct filename_partial_match_opts |
| 4118 | { |
| 4119 | /* Only match the directory name part. */ |
| 4120 | bool dirname = false; |
| 4121 | |
| 4122 | /* Only match the basename part. */ |
| 4123 | bool basename = false; |
| 4124 | }; |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 | /* Data structure to maintain printing state for output_source_filename. */ |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 | struct output_source_filename_data |
| 4129 | { |
| 4130 | /* Output only filenames matching REGEXP. */ |
| 4131 | std::string regexp; |
| 4132 | gdb::optional<compiled_regex> c_regexp; |
| 4133 | /* Possibly only match a part of the filename. */ |
| 4134 | filename_partial_match_opts partial_match; |
| 4135 | |
| 4136 | |
| 4137 | /* Cache of what we've seen so far. */ |
| 4138 | struct filename_seen_cache *filename_seen_cache; |
| 4139 | |
| 4140 | /* Flag of whether we're printing the first one. */ |
| 4141 | int first; |
| 4142 | }; |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 | /* Slave routine for sources_info. Force line breaks at ,'s. |
| 4145 | NAME is the name to print. |
| 4146 | DATA contains the state for printing and watching for duplicates. */ |
| 4147 | |
| 4148 | static void |
| 4149 | output_source_filename (const char *name, |
| 4150 | struct output_source_filename_data *data) |
| 4151 | { |
| 4152 | /* Since a single source file can result in several partial symbol |
| 4153 | tables, we need to avoid printing it more than once. Note: if |
| 4154 | some of the psymtabs are read in and some are not, it gets |
| 4155 | printed both under "Source files for which symbols have been |
| 4156 | read" and "Source files for which symbols will be read in on |
| 4157 | demand". I consider this a reasonable way to deal with the |
| 4158 | situation. I'm not sure whether this can also happen for |
| 4159 | symtabs; it doesn't hurt to check. */ |
| 4160 | |
| 4161 | /* Was NAME already seen? */ |
| 4162 | if (data->filename_seen_cache->seen (name)) |
| 4163 | { |
| 4164 | /* Yes; don't print it again. */ |
| 4165 | return; |
| 4166 | } |
| 4167 | |
| 4168 | /* Does it match data->regexp? */ |
| 4169 | if (data->c_regexp.has_value ()) |
| 4170 | { |
| 4171 | const char *to_match; |
| 4172 | std::string dirname; |
| 4173 | |
| 4174 | if (data->partial_match.dirname) |
| 4175 | { |
| 4176 | dirname = ldirname (name); |
| 4177 | to_match = dirname.c_str (); |
| 4178 | } |
| 4179 | else if (data->partial_match.basename) |
| 4180 | to_match = lbasename (name); |
| 4181 | else |
| 4182 | to_match = name; |
| 4183 | |
| 4184 | if (data->c_regexp->exec (to_match, 0, NULL, 0) != 0) |
| 4185 | return; |
| 4186 | } |
| 4187 | |
| 4188 | /* Print it and reset *FIRST. */ |
| 4189 | if (! data->first) |
| 4190 | printf_filtered (", "); |
| 4191 | data->first = 0; |
| 4192 | |
| 4193 | wrap_here (""); |
| 4194 | fputs_styled (name, file_name_style.style (), gdb_stdout); |
| 4195 | } |
| 4196 | |
| 4197 | /* A callback for map_partial_symbol_filenames. */ |
| 4198 | |
| 4199 | static void |
| 4200 | output_partial_symbol_filename (const char *filename, const char *fullname, |
| 4201 | void *data) |
| 4202 | { |
| 4203 | output_source_filename (fullname ? fullname : filename, |
| 4204 | (struct output_source_filename_data *) data); |
| 4205 | } |
| 4206 | |
| 4207 | using isrc_flag_option_def |
| 4208 | = gdb::option::flag_option_def<filename_partial_match_opts>; |
| 4209 | |
| 4210 | static const gdb::option::option_def info_sources_option_defs[] = { |
| 4211 | |
| 4212 | isrc_flag_option_def { |
| 4213 | "dirname", |
| 4214 | [] (filename_partial_match_opts *opts) { return &opts->dirname; }, |
| 4215 | N_("Show only the files having a dirname matching REGEXP."), |
| 4216 | }, |
| 4217 | |
| 4218 | isrc_flag_option_def { |
| 4219 | "basename", |
| 4220 | [] (filename_partial_match_opts *opts) { return &opts->basename; }, |
| 4221 | N_("Show only the files having a basename matching REGEXP."), |
| 4222 | }, |
| 4223 | |
| 4224 | }; |
| 4225 | |
| 4226 | /* Create an option_def_group for the "info sources" options, with |
| 4227 | ISRC_OPTS as context. */ |
| 4228 | |
| 4229 | static inline gdb::option::option_def_group |
| 4230 | make_info_sources_options_def_group (filename_partial_match_opts *isrc_opts) |
| 4231 | { |
| 4232 | return {{info_sources_option_defs}, isrc_opts}; |
| 4233 | } |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 | /* Prints the header message for the source files that will be printed |
| 4236 | with the matching info present in DATA. SYMBOL_MSG is a message |
| 4237 | that tells what will or has been done with the symbols of the |
| 4238 | matching source files. */ |
| 4239 | |
| 4240 | static void |
| 4241 | print_info_sources_header (const char *symbol_msg, |
| 4242 | const struct output_source_filename_data *data) |
| 4243 | { |
| 4244 | puts_filtered (symbol_msg); |
| 4245 | if (!data->regexp.empty ()) |
| 4246 | { |
| 4247 | if (data->partial_match.dirname) |
| 4248 | printf_filtered (_("(dirname matching regular expression \"%s\")"), |
| 4249 | data->regexp.c_str ()); |
| 4250 | else if (data->partial_match.basename) |
| 4251 | printf_filtered (_("(basename matching regular expression \"%s\")"), |
| 4252 | data->regexp.c_str ()); |
| 4253 | else |
| 4254 | printf_filtered (_("(filename matching regular expression \"%s\")"), |
| 4255 | data->regexp.c_str ()); |
| 4256 | } |
| 4257 | puts_filtered ("\n"); |
| 4258 | } |
| 4259 | |
| 4260 | /* Completer for "info sources". */ |
| 4261 | |
| 4262 | static void |
| 4263 | info_sources_command_completer (cmd_list_element *ignore, |
| 4264 | completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 4265 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 4266 | { |
| 4267 | const auto group = make_info_sources_options_def_group (nullptr); |
| 4268 | if (gdb::option::complete_options |
| 4269 | (tracker, &text, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, group)) |
| 4270 | return; |
| 4271 | } |
| 4272 | |
| 4273 | static void |
| 4274 | info_sources_command (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 4275 | { |
| 4276 | struct output_source_filename_data data; |
| 4277 | |
| 4278 | if (!have_full_symbols () && !have_partial_symbols ()) |
| 4279 | { |
| 4280 | error (_("No symbol table is loaded. Use the \"file\" command.")); |
| 4281 | } |
| 4282 | |
| 4283 | filename_seen_cache filenames_seen; |
| 4284 | |
| 4285 | auto group = make_info_sources_options_def_group (&data.partial_match); |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 | gdb::option::process_options |
| 4288 | (&args, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_ERROR, group); |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 | if (args != NULL && *args != '\000') |
| 4291 | data.regexp = args; |
| 4292 | |
| 4293 | data.filename_seen_cache = &filenames_seen; |
| 4294 | data.first = 1; |
| 4295 | |
| 4296 | if (data.partial_match.dirname && data.partial_match.basename) |
| 4297 | error (_("You cannot give both -basename and -dirname to 'info sources'.")); |
| 4298 | if ((data.partial_match.dirname || data.partial_match.basename) |
| 4299 | && data.regexp.empty ()) |
| 4300 | error (_("Missing REGEXP for 'info sources'.")); |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 | if (data.regexp.empty ()) |
| 4303 | data.c_regexp.reset (); |
| 4304 | else |
| 4305 | { |
| 4306 | int cflags = REG_NOSUB; |
| 4307 | #ifdef HAVE_CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILE_SYSTEM |
| 4308 | cflags |= REG_ICASE; |
| 4309 | #endif |
| 4310 | data.c_regexp.emplace (data.regexp.c_str (), cflags, |
| 4311 | _("Invalid regexp")); |
| 4312 | } |
| 4313 | |
| 4314 | print_info_sources_header |
| 4315 | (_("Source files for which symbols have been read in:\n"), &data); |
| 4316 | |
| 4317 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 4318 | { |
| 4319 | for (compunit_symtab *cu : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 4320 | { |
| 4321 | for (symtab *s : compunit_filetabs (cu)) |
| 4322 | { |
| 4323 | const char *fullname = symtab_to_fullname (s); |
| 4324 | |
| 4325 | output_source_filename (fullname, &data); |
| 4326 | } |
| 4327 | } |
| 4328 | } |
| 4329 | printf_filtered ("\n\n"); |
| 4330 | |
| 4331 | print_info_sources_header |
| 4332 | (_("Source files for which symbols will be read in on demand:\n"), &data); |
| 4333 | |
| 4334 | filenames_seen.clear (); |
| 4335 | data.first = 1; |
| 4336 | map_symbol_filenames (output_partial_symbol_filename, &data, |
| 4337 | 1 /*need_fullname*/); |
| 4338 | printf_filtered ("\n"); |
| 4339 | } |
| 4340 | |
| 4341 | /* Compare FILE against all the NFILES entries of FILES. If BASENAMES is |
| 4342 | non-zero compare only lbasename of FILES. */ |
| 4343 | |
| 4344 | static int |
| 4345 | file_matches (const char *file, const char *files[], int nfiles, int basenames) |
| 4346 | { |
| 4347 | int i; |
| 4348 | |
| 4349 | if (file != NULL && nfiles != 0) |
| 4350 | { |
| 4351 | for (i = 0; i < nfiles; i++) |
| 4352 | { |
| 4353 | if (compare_filenames_for_search (file, (basenames |
| 4354 | ? lbasename (files[i]) |
| 4355 | : files[i]))) |
| 4356 | return 1; |
| 4357 | } |
| 4358 | } |
| 4359 | else if (nfiles == 0) |
| 4360 | return 1; |
| 4361 | return 0; |
| 4362 | } |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 | /* Helper function for sort_search_symbols_remove_dups and qsort. Can only |
| 4365 | sort symbols, not minimal symbols. */ |
| 4366 | |
| 4367 | int |
| 4368 | symbol_search::compare_search_syms (const symbol_search &sym_a, |
| 4369 | const symbol_search &sym_b) |
| 4370 | { |
| 4371 | int c; |
| 4372 | |
| 4373 | c = FILENAME_CMP (symbol_symtab (sym_a.symbol)->filename, |
| 4374 | symbol_symtab (sym_b.symbol)->filename); |
| 4375 | if (c != 0) |
| 4376 | return c; |
| 4377 | |
| 4378 | if (sym_a.block != sym_b.block) |
| 4379 | return sym_a.block - sym_b.block; |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 | return strcmp (SYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (sym_a.symbol), |
| 4382 | SYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (sym_b.symbol)); |
| 4383 | } |
| 4384 | |
| 4385 | /* Returns true if the type_name of symbol_type of SYM matches TREG. |
| 4386 | If SYM has no symbol_type or symbol_name, returns false. */ |
| 4387 | |
| 4388 | bool |
| 4389 | treg_matches_sym_type_name (const compiled_regex &treg, |
| 4390 | const struct symbol *sym) |
| 4391 | { |
| 4392 | struct type *sym_type; |
| 4393 | std::string printed_sym_type_name; |
| 4394 | |
| 4395 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 4396 | { |
| 4397 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 4398 | "treg_matches_sym_type_name\n sym %s\n", |
| 4399 | SYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (sym)); |
| 4400 | } |
| 4401 | |
| 4402 | sym_type = SYMBOL_TYPE (sym); |
| 4403 | if (sym_type == NULL) |
| 4404 | return false; |
| 4405 | |
| 4406 | { |
| 4407 | scoped_switch_to_sym_language_if_auto l (sym); |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 | printed_sym_type_name = type_to_string (sym_type); |
| 4410 | } |
| 4411 | |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 | if (symbol_lookup_debug > 1) |
| 4414 | { |
| 4415 | fprintf_unfiltered (gdb_stdlog, |
| 4416 | " sym_type_name %s\n", |
| 4417 | printed_sym_type_name.c_str ()); |
| 4418 | } |
| 4419 | |
| 4420 | |
| 4421 | if (printed_sym_type_name.empty ()) |
| 4422 | return false; |
| 4423 | |
| 4424 | return treg.exec (printed_sym_type_name.c_str (), 0, NULL, 0) == 0; |
| 4425 | } |
| 4426 | |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 | /* Sort the symbols in RESULT and remove duplicates. */ |
| 4429 | |
| 4430 | static void |
| 4431 | sort_search_symbols_remove_dups (std::vector<symbol_search> *result) |
| 4432 | { |
| 4433 | std::sort (result->begin (), result->end ()); |
| 4434 | result->erase (std::unique (result->begin (), result->end ()), |
| 4435 | result->end ()); |
| 4436 | } |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 | /* Search the symbol table for matches to the regular expression REGEXP, |
| 4439 | returning the results. |
| 4440 | |
| 4441 | Only symbols of KIND are searched: |
| 4442 | VARIABLES_DOMAIN - search all symbols, excluding functions, type names, |
| 4443 | and constants (enums). |
| 4444 | if T_REGEXP is not NULL, only returns var that have |
| 4445 | a type matching regular expression T_REGEXP. |
| 4446 | FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN - search all functions |
| 4447 | TYPES_DOMAIN - search all type names |
| 4448 | ALL_DOMAIN - an internal error for this function |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 | Within each file the results are sorted locally; each symtab's global and |
| 4451 | static blocks are separately alphabetized. |
| 4452 | Duplicate entries are removed. |
| 4453 | |
| 4454 | When EXCLUDE_MINSYMS is false then matching minsyms are also returned, |
| 4455 | otherwise they are excluded. */ |
| 4456 | |
| 4457 | std::vector<symbol_search> |
| 4458 | search_symbols (const char *regexp, enum search_domain kind, |
| 4459 | const char *t_regexp, |
| 4460 | int nfiles, const char *files[], |
| 4461 | bool exclude_minsyms) |
| 4462 | { |
| 4463 | const struct blockvector *bv; |
| 4464 | const struct block *b; |
| 4465 | int i = 0; |
| 4466 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 4467 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 4468 | int found_misc = 0; |
| 4469 | static const enum minimal_symbol_type types[] |
| 4470 | = {mst_data, mst_text, mst_unknown}; |
| 4471 | static const enum minimal_symbol_type types2[] |
| 4472 | = {mst_bss, mst_file_text, mst_unknown}; |
| 4473 | static const enum minimal_symbol_type types3[] |
| 4474 | = {mst_file_data, mst_solib_trampoline, mst_unknown}; |
| 4475 | static const enum minimal_symbol_type types4[] |
| 4476 | = {mst_file_bss, mst_text_gnu_ifunc, mst_unknown}; |
| 4477 | enum minimal_symbol_type ourtype; |
| 4478 | enum minimal_symbol_type ourtype2; |
| 4479 | enum minimal_symbol_type ourtype3; |
| 4480 | enum minimal_symbol_type ourtype4; |
| 4481 | std::vector<symbol_search> result; |
| 4482 | gdb::optional<compiled_regex> preg; |
| 4483 | gdb::optional<compiled_regex> treg; |
| 4484 | |
| 4485 | gdb_assert (kind <= TYPES_DOMAIN); |
| 4486 | |
| 4487 | ourtype = types[kind]; |
| 4488 | ourtype2 = types2[kind]; |
| 4489 | ourtype3 = types3[kind]; |
| 4490 | ourtype4 = types4[kind]; |
| 4491 | |
| 4492 | if (regexp != NULL) |
| 4493 | { |
| 4494 | /* Make sure spacing is right for C++ operators. |
| 4495 | This is just a courtesy to make the matching less sensitive |
| 4496 | to how many spaces the user leaves between 'operator' |
| 4497 | and <TYPENAME> or <OPERATOR>. */ |
| 4498 | const char *opend; |
| 4499 | const char *opname = operator_chars (regexp, &opend); |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 | if (*opname) |
| 4502 | { |
| 4503 | int fix = -1; /* -1 means ok; otherwise number of |
| 4504 | spaces needed. */ |
| 4505 | |
| 4506 | if (isalpha (*opname) || *opname == '_' || *opname == '$') |
| 4507 | { |
| 4508 | /* There should 1 space between 'operator' and 'TYPENAME'. */ |
| 4509 | if (opname[-1] != ' ' || opname[-2] == ' ') |
| 4510 | fix = 1; |
| 4511 | } |
| 4512 | else |
| 4513 | { |
| 4514 | /* There should 0 spaces between 'operator' and 'OPERATOR'. */ |
| 4515 | if (opname[-1] == ' ') |
| 4516 | fix = 0; |
| 4517 | } |
| 4518 | /* If wrong number of spaces, fix it. */ |
| 4519 | if (fix >= 0) |
| 4520 | { |
| 4521 | char *tmp = (char *) alloca (8 + fix + strlen (opname) + 1); |
| 4522 | |
| 4523 | sprintf (tmp, "operator%.*s%s", fix, " ", opname); |
| 4524 | regexp = tmp; |
| 4525 | } |
| 4526 | } |
| 4527 | |
| 4528 | int cflags = REG_NOSUB | (case_sensitivity == case_sensitive_off |
| 4529 | ? REG_ICASE : 0); |
| 4530 | preg.emplace (regexp, cflags, _("Invalid regexp")); |
| 4531 | } |
| 4532 | |
| 4533 | if (t_regexp != NULL) |
| 4534 | { |
| 4535 | int cflags = REG_NOSUB | (case_sensitivity == case_sensitive_off |
| 4536 | ? REG_ICASE : 0); |
| 4537 | treg.emplace (t_regexp, cflags, _("Invalid regexp")); |
| 4538 | } |
| 4539 | |
| 4540 | /* Search through the partial symtabs *first* for all symbols |
| 4541 | matching the regexp. That way we don't have to reproduce all of |
| 4542 | the machinery below. */ |
| 4543 | expand_symtabs_matching ([&] (const char *filename, bool basenames) |
| 4544 | { |
| 4545 | return file_matches (filename, files, nfiles, |
| 4546 | basenames); |
| 4547 | }, |
| 4548 | lookup_name_info::match_any (), |
| 4549 | [&] (const char *symname) |
| 4550 | { |
| 4551 | return (!preg.has_value () |
| 4552 | || preg->exec (symname, |
| 4553 | 0, NULL, 0) == 0); |
| 4554 | }, |
| 4555 | NULL, |
| 4556 | kind); |
| 4557 | |
| 4558 | /* Here, we search through the minimal symbol tables for functions |
| 4559 | and variables that match, and force their symbols to be read. |
| 4560 | This is in particular necessary for demangled variable names, |
| 4561 | which are no longer put into the partial symbol tables. |
| 4562 | The symbol will then be found during the scan of symtabs below. |
| 4563 | |
| 4564 | For functions, find_pc_symtab should succeed if we have debug info |
| 4565 | for the function, for variables we have to call |
| 4566 | lookup_symbol_in_objfile_from_linkage_name to determine if the variable |
| 4567 | has debug info. |
| 4568 | If the lookup fails, set found_misc so that we will rescan to print |
| 4569 | any matching symbols without debug info. |
| 4570 | We only search the objfile the msymbol came from, we no longer search |
| 4571 | all objfiles. In large programs (1000s of shared libs) searching all |
| 4572 | objfiles is not worth the pain. */ |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 | if (nfiles == 0 && (kind == VARIABLES_DOMAIN || kind == FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN)) |
| 4575 | { |
| 4576 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 4577 | { |
| 4578 | for (minimal_symbol *msymbol : objfile->msymbols ()) |
| 4579 | { |
| 4580 | QUIT; |
| 4581 | |
| 4582 | if (msymbol->created_by_gdb) |
| 4583 | continue; |
| 4584 | |
| 4585 | if (MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype |
| 4586 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype2 |
| 4587 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype3 |
| 4588 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype4) |
| 4589 | { |
| 4590 | if (!preg.has_value () |
| 4591 | || preg->exec (MSYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (msymbol), 0, |
| 4592 | NULL, 0) == 0) |
| 4593 | { |
| 4594 | /* Note: An important side-effect of these |
| 4595 | lookup functions is to expand the symbol |
| 4596 | table if msymbol is found, for the benefit of |
| 4597 | the next loop on compunits. */ |
| 4598 | if (kind == FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN |
| 4599 | ? (find_pc_compunit_symtab |
| 4600 | (MSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (objfile, msymbol)) |
| 4601 | == NULL) |
| 4602 | : (lookup_symbol_in_objfile_from_linkage_name |
| 4603 | (objfile, MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol), |
| 4604 | VAR_DOMAIN) |
| 4605 | .symbol == NULL)) |
| 4606 | found_misc = 1; |
| 4607 | } |
| 4608 | } |
| 4609 | } |
| 4610 | } |
| 4611 | } |
| 4612 | |
| 4613 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 4614 | { |
| 4615 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 4616 | { |
| 4617 | bv = COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust); |
| 4618 | for (i = GLOBAL_BLOCK; i <= STATIC_BLOCK; i++) |
| 4619 | { |
| 4620 | b = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (bv, i); |
| 4621 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (b, iter, sym) |
| 4622 | { |
| 4623 | struct symtab *real_symtab = symbol_symtab (sym); |
| 4624 | |
| 4625 | QUIT; |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 | /* Check first sole REAL_SYMTAB->FILENAME. It does |
| 4628 | not need to be a substring of symtab_to_fullname as |
| 4629 | it may contain "./" etc. */ |
| 4630 | if ((file_matches (real_symtab->filename, files, nfiles, 0) |
| 4631 | || ((basenames_may_differ |
| 4632 | || file_matches (lbasename (real_symtab->filename), |
| 4633 | files, nfiles, 1)) |
| 4634 | && file_matches (symtab_to_fullname (real_symtab), |
| 4635 | files, nfiles, 0))) |
| 4636 | && ((!preg.has_value () |
| 4637 | || preg->exec (SYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (sym), 0, |
| 4638 | NULL, 0) == 0) |
| 4639 | && ((kind == VARIABLES_DOMAIN |
| 4640 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) != LOC_TYPEDEF |
| 4641 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) != LOC_UNRESOLVED |
| 4642 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) != LOC_BLOCK |
| 4643 | /* LOC_CONST can be used for more than |
| 4644 | just enums, e.g., c++ static const |
| 4645 | members. We only want to skip enums |
| 4646 | here. */ |
| 4647 | && !(SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_CONST |
| 4648 | && (TYPE_CODE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym)) |
| 4649 | == TYPE_CODE_ENUM)) |
| 4650 | && (!treg.has_value () |
| 4651 | || treg_matches_sym_type_name (*treg, sym))) |
| 4652 | || (kind == FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN |
| 4653 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_BLOCK |
| 4654 | && (!treg.has_value () |
| 4655 | || treg_matches_sym_type_name (*treg, |
| 4656 | sym))) |
| 4657 | || (kind == TYPES_DOMAIN |
| 4658 | && SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_TYPEDEF |
| 4659 | && SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym) != MODULE_DOMAIN)))) |
| 4660 | { |
| 4661 | /* match */ |
| 4662 | result.emplace_back (i, sym); |
| 4663 | } |
| 4664 | } |
| 4665 | } |
| 4666 | } |
| 4667 | } |
| 4668 | |
| 4669 | if (!result.empty ()) |
| 4670 | sort_search_symbols_remove_dups (&result); |
| 4671 | |
| 4672 | /* If there are no eyes, avoid all contact. I mean, if there are |
| 4673 | no debug symbols, then add matching minsyms. But if the user wants |
| 4674 | to see symbols matching a type regexp, then never give a minimal symbol, |
| 4675 | as we assume that a minimal symbol does not have a type. */ |
| 4676 | |
| 4677 | if ((found_misc || (nfiles == 0 && kind != FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN)) |
| 4678 | && !exclude_minsyms |
| 4679 | && !treg.has_value ()) |
| 4680 | { |
| 4681 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 4682 | { |
| 4683 | for (minimal_symbol *msymbol : objfile->msymbols ()) |
| 4684 | { |
| 4685 | QUIT; |
| 4686 | |
| 4687 | if (msymbol->created_by_gdb) |
| 4688 | continue; |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 | if (MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype |
| 4691 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype2 |
| 4692 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype3 |
| 4693 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol) == ourtype4) |
| 4694 | { |
| 4695 | if (!preg.has_value () |
| 4696 | || preg->exec (MSYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (msymbol), 0, |
| 4697 | NULL, 0) == 0) |
| 4698 | { |
| 4699 | /* For functions we can do a quick check of whether the |
| 4700 | symbol might be found via find_pc_symtab. */ |
| 4701 | if (kind != FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN |
| 4702 | || (find_pc_compunit_symtab |
| 4703 | (MSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (objfile, msymbol)) |
| 4704 | == NULL)) |
| 4705 | { |
| 4706 | if (lookup_symbol_in_objfile_from_linkage_name |
| 4707 | (objfile, MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (msymbol), |
| 4708 | VAR_DOMAIN) |
| 4709 | .symbol == NULL) |
| 4710 | { |
| 4711 | /* match */ |
| 4712 | result.emplace_back (i, msymbol, objfile); |
| 4713 | } |
| 4714 | } |
| 4715 | } |
| 4716 | } |
| 4717 | } |
| 4718 | } |
| 4719 | } |
| 4720 | |
| 4721 | return result; |
| 4722 | } |
| 4723 | |
| 4724 | /* Helper function for symtab_symbol_info, this function uses |
| 4725 | the data returned from search_symbols() to print information |
| 4726 | regarding the match to gdb_stdout. If LAST is not NULL, |
| 4727 | print file and line number information for the symbol as |
| 4728 | well. Skip printing the filename if it matches LAST. */ |
| 4729 | |
| 4730 | static void |
| 4731 | print_symbol_info (enum search_domain kind, |
| 4732 | struct symbol *sym, |
| 4733 | int block, const char *last) |
| 4734 | { |
| 4735 | scoped_switch_to_sym_language_if_auto l (sym); |
| 4736 | struct symtab *s = symbol_symtab (sym); |
| 4737 | |
| 4738 | if (last != NULL) |
| 4739 | { |
| 4740 | const char *s_filename = symtab_to_filename_for_display (s); |
| 4741 | |
| 4742 | if (filename_cmp (last, s_filename) != 0) |
| 4743 | { |
| 4744 | printf_filtered (_("\nFile %ps:\n"), |
| 4745 | styled_string (file_name_style.style (), |
| 4746 | s_filename)); |
| 4747 | } |
| 4748 | |
| 4749 | if (SYMBOL_LINE (sym) != 0) |
| 4750 | printf_filtered ("%d:\t", SYMBOL_LINE (sym)); |
| 4751 | else |
| 4752 | puts_filtered ("\t"); |
| 4753 | } |
| 4754 | |
| 4755 | if (kind != TYPES_DOMAIN && block == STATIC_BLOCK) |
| 4756 | printf_filtered ("static "); |
| 4757 | |
| 4758 | /* Typedef that is not a C++ class. */ |
| 4759 | if (kind == TYPES_DOMAIN |
| 4760 | && SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym) != STRUCT_DOMAIN) |
| 4761 | { |
| 4762 | /* FIXME: For C (and C++) we end up with a difference in output here |
| 4763 | between how a typedef is printed, and non-typedefs are printed. |
| 4764 | The TYPEDEF_PRINT code places a ";" at the end in an attempt to |
| 4765 | appear C-like, while TYPE_PRINT doesn't. |
| 4766 | |
| 4767 | For the struct printing case below, things are worse, we force |
| 4768 | printing of the ";" in this function, which is going to be wrong |
| 4769 | for languages that don't require a ";" between statements. */ |
| 4770 | if (TYPE_CODE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym)) == TYPE_CODE_TYPEDEF) |
| 4771 | typedef_print (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym), sym, gdb_stdout); |
| 4772 | else |
| 4773 | { |
| 4774 | type_print (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym), "", gdb_stdout, -1); |
| 4775 | printf_filtered ("\n"); |
| 4776 | } |
| 4777 | } |
| 4778 | /* variable, func, or typedef-that-is-c++-class. */ |
| 4779 | else if (kind < TYPES_DOMAIN |
| 4780 | || (kind == TYPES_DOMAIN |
| 4781 | && SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym) == STRUCT_DOMAIN)) |
| 4782 | { |
| 4783 | type_print (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym), |
| 4784 | (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_TYPEDEF |
| 4785 | ? "" : SYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (sym)), |
| 4786 | gdb_stdout, 0); |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 | printf_filtered (";\n"); |
| 4789 | } |
| 4790 | } |
| 4791 | |
| 4792 | /* This help function for symtab_symbol_info() prints information |
| 4793 | for non-debugging symbols to gdb_stdout. */ |
| 4794 | |
| 4795 | static void |
| 4796 | print_msymbol_info (struct bound_minimal_symbol msymbol) |
| 4797 | { |
| 4798 | struct gdbarch *gdbarch = get_objfile_arch (msymbol.objfile); |
| 4799 | char *tmp; |
| 4800 | |
| 4801 | if (gdbarch_addr_bit (gdbarch) <= 32) |
| 4802 | tmp = hex_string_custom (BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (msymbol) |
| 4803 | & (CORE_ADDR) 0xffffffff, |
| 4804 | 8); |
| 4805 | else |
| 4806 | tmp = hex_string_custom (BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (msymbol), |
| 4807 | 16); |
| 4808 | |
| 4809 | ui_file_style sym_style = (msymbol.minsym->text_p () |
| 4810 | ? function_name_style.style () |
| 4811 | : ui_file_style ()); |
| 4812 | |
| 4813 | printf_filtered (_("%ps %ps\n"), |
| 4814 | styled_string (address_style.style (), tmp), |
| 4815 | styled_string (sym_style, |
| 4816 | MSYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (msymbol.minsym))); |
| 4817 | } |
| 4818 | |
| 4819 | /* This is the guts of the commands "info functions", "info types", and |
| 4820 | "info variables". It calls search_symbols to find all matches and then |
| 4821 | print_[m]symbol_info to print out some useful information about the |
| 4822 | matches. */ |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 | static void |
| 4825 | symtab_symbol_info (bool quiet, bool exclude_minsyms, |
| 4826 | const char *regexp, enum search_domain kind, |
| 4827 | const char *t_regexp, int from_tty) |
| 4828 | { |
| 4829 | static const char * const classnames[] = |
| 4830 | {"variable", "function", "type"}; |
| 4831 | const char *last_filename = ""; |
| 4832 | int first = 1; |
| 4833 | |
| 4834 | gdb_assert (kind <= TYPES_DOMAIN); |
| 4835 | |
| 4836 | if (regexp != nullptr && *regexp == '\0') |
| 4837 | regexp = nullptr; |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 | /* Must make sure that if we're interrupted, symbols gets freed. */ |
| 4840 | std::vector<symbol_search> symbols = search_symbols (regexp, kind, |
| 4841 | t_regexp, 0, NULL, |
| 4842 | exclude_minsyms); |
| 4843 | |
| 4844 | if (!quiet) |
| 4845 | { |
| 4846 | if (regexp != NULL) |
| 4847 | { |
| 4848 | if (t_regexp != NULL) |
| 4849 | printf_filtered |
| 4850 | (_("All %ss matching regular expression \"%s\"" |
| 4851 | " with type matching regular expression \"%s\":\n"), |
| 4852 | classnames[kind], regexp, t_regexp); |
| 4853 | else |
| 4854 | printf_filtered (_("All %ss matching regular expression \"%s\":\n"), |
| 4855 | classnames[kind], regexp); |
| 4856 | } |
| 4857 | else |
| 4858 | { |
| 4859 | if (t_regexp != NULL) |
| 4860 | printf_filtered |
| 4861 | (_("All defined %ss" |
| 4862 | " with type matching regular expression \"%s\" :\n"), |
| 4863 | classnames[kind], t_regexp); |
| 4864 | else |
| 4865 | printf_filtered (_("All defined %ss:\n"), classnames[kind]); |
| 4866 | } |
| 4867 | } |
| 4868 | |
| 4869 | for (const symbol_search &p : symbols) |
| 4870 | { |
| 4871 | QUIT; |
| 4872 | |
| 4873 | if (p.msymbol.minsym != NULL) |
| 4874 | { |
| 4875 | if (first) |
| 4876 | { |
| 4877 | if (!quiet) |
| 4878 | printf_filtered (_("\nNon-debugging symbols:\n")); |
| 4879 | first = 0; |
| 4880 | } |
| 4881 | print_msymbol_info (p.msymbol); |
| 4882 | } |
| 4883 | else |
| 4884 | { |
| 4885 | print_symbol_info (kind, |
| 4886 | p.symbol, |
| 4887 | p.block, |
| 4888 | last_filename); |
| 4889 | last_filename |
| 4890 | = symtab_to_filename_for_display (symbol_symtab (p.symbol)); |
| 4891 | } |
| 4892 | } |
| 4893 | } |
| 4894 | |
| 4895 | /* Structure to hold the values of the options used by the 'info variables' |
| 4896 | and 'info functions' commands. These correspond to the -q, -t, and -n |
| 4897 | options. */ |
| 4898 | |
| 4899 | struct info_print_options |
| 4900 | { |
| 4901 | bool quiet = false; |
| 4902 | bool exclude_minsyms = false; |
| 4903 | char *type_regexp = nullptr; |
| 4904 | |
| 4905 | ~info_print_options () |
| 4906 | { |
| 4907 | xfree (type_regexp); |
| 4908 | } |
| 4909 | }; |
| 4910 | |
| 4911 | /* The options used by the 'info variables' and 'info functions' |
| 4912 | commands. */ |
| 4913 | |
| 4914 | static const gdb::option::option_def info_print_options_defs[] = { |
| 4915 | gdb::option::boolean_option_def<info_print_options> { |
| 4916 | "q", |
| 4917 | [] (info_print_options *opt) { return &opt->quiet; }, |
| 4918 | nullptr, /* show_cmd_cb */ |
| 4919 | nullptr /* set_doc */ |
| 4920 | }, |
| 4921 | |
| 4922 | gdb::option::boolean_option_def<info_print_options> { |
| 4923 | "n", |
| 4924 | [] (info_print_options *opt) { return &opt->exclude_minsyms; }, |
| 4925 | nullptr, /* show_cmd_cb */ |
| 4926 | nullptr /* set_doc */ |
| 4927 | }, |
| 4928 | |
| 4929 | gdb::option::string_option_def<info_print_options> { |
| 4930 | "t", |
| 4931 | [] (info_print_options *opt) { return &opt->type_regexp; }, |
| 4932 | nullptr, /* show_cmd_cb */ |
| 4933 | nullptr /* set_doc */ |
| 4934 | } |
| 4935 | }; |
| 4936 | |
| 4937 | /* Returns the option group used by 'info variables' and 'info |
| 4938 | functions'. */ |
| 4939 | |
| 4940 | static gdb::option::option_def_group |
| 4941 | make_info_print_options_def_group (info_print_options *opts) |
| 4942 | { |
| 4943 | return {{info_print_options_defs}, opts}; |
| 4944 | } |
| 4945 | |
| 4946 | /* Command completer for 'info variables' and 'info functions'. */ |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 | static void |
| 4949 | info_print_command_completer (struct cmd_list_element *ignore, |
| 4950 | completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 4951 | const char *text, const char * /* word */) |
| 4952 | { |
| 4953 | const auto group |
| 4954 | = make_info_print_options_def_group (nullptr); |
| 4955 | if (gdb::option::complete_options |
| 4956 | (tracker, &text, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, group)) |
| 4957 | return; |
| 4958 | |
| 4959 | const char *word = advance_to_expression_complete_word_point (tracker, text); |
| 4960 | symbol_completer (ignore, tracker, text, word); |
| 4961 | } |
| 4962 | |
| 4963 | /* Implement the 'info variables' command. */ |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 | static void |
| 4966 | info_variables_command (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 4967 | { |
| 4968 | info_print_options opts; |
| 4969 | auto grp = make_info_print_options_def_group (&opts); |
| 4970 | gdb::option::process_options |
| 4971 | (&args, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, grp); |
| 4972 | if (args != nullptr && *args == '\0') |
| 4973 | args = nullptr; |
| 4974 | |
| 4975 | symtab_symbol_info (opts.quiet, opts.exclude_minsyms, args, VARIABLES_DOMAIN, |
| 4976 | opts.type_regexp, from_tty); |
| 4977 | } |
| 4978 | |
| 4979 | /* Implement the 'info functions' command. */ |
| 4980 | |
| 4981 | static void |
| 4982 | info_functions_command (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 4983 | { |
| 4984 | info_print_options opts; |
| 4985 | auto grp = make_info_print_options_def_group (&opts); |
| 4986 | gdb::option::process_options |
| 4987 | (&args, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, grp); |
| 4988 | if (args != nullptr && *args == '\0') |
| 4989 | args = nullptr; |
| 4990 | |
| 4991 | symtab_symbol_info (opts.quiet, opts.exclude_minsyms, args, |
| 4992 | FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN, opts.type_regexp, from_tty); |
| 4993 | } |
| 4994 | |
| 4995 | /* Holds the -q option for the 'info types' command. */ |
| 4996 | |
| 4997 | struct info_types_options |
| 4998 | { |
| 4999 | bool quiet = false; |
| 5000 | }; |
| 5001 | |
| 5002 | /* The options used by the 'info types' command. */ |
| 5003 | |
| 5004 | static const gdb::option::option_def info_types_options_defs[] = { |
| 5005 | gdb::option::boolean_option_def<info_types_options> { |
| 5006 | "q", |
| 5007 | [] (info_types_options *opt) { return &opt->quiet; }, |
| 5008 | nullptr, /* show_cmd_cb */ |
| 5009 | nullptr /* set_doc */ |
| 5010 | } |
| 5011 | }; |
| 5012 | |
| 5013 | /* Returns the option group used by 'info types'. */ |
| 5014 | |
| 5015 | static gdb::option::option_def_group |
| 5016 | make_info_types_options_def_group (info_types_options *opts) |
| 5017 | { |
| 5018 | return {{info_types_options_defs}, opts}; |
| 5019 | } |
| 5020 | |
| 5021 | /* Implement the 'info types' command. */ |
| 5022 | |
| 5023 | static void |
| 5024 | info_types_command (const char *args, int from_tty) |
| 5025 | { |
| 5026 | info_types_options opts; |
| 5027 | |
| 5028 | auto grp = make_info_types_options_def_group (&opts); |
| 5029 | gdb::option::process_options |
| 5030 | (&args, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, grp); |
| 5031 | if (args != nullptr && *args == '\0') |
| 5032 | args = nullptr; |
| 5033 | symtab_symbol_info (opts.quiet, false, args, TYPES_DOMAIN, NULL, from_tty); |
| 5034 | } |
| 5035 | |
| 5036 | /* Command completer for 'info types' command. */ |
| 5037 | |
| 5038 | static void |
| 5039 | info_types_command_completer (struct cmd_list_element *ignore, |
| 5040 | completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5041 | const char *text, const char * /* word */) |
| 5042 | { |
| 5043 | const auto group |
| 5044 | = make_info_types_options_def_group (nullptr); |
| 5045 | if (gdb::option::complete_options |
| 5046 | (tracker, &text, gdb::option::PROCESS_OPTIONS_UNKNOWN_IS_OPERAND, group)) |
| 5047 | return; |
| 5048 | |
| 5049 | const char *word = advance_to_expression_complete_word_point (tracker, text); |
| 5050 | symbol_completer (ignore, tracker, text, word); |
| 5051 | } |
| 5052 | |
| 5053 | /* Breakpoint all functions matching regular expression. */ |
| 5054 | |
| 5055 | void |
| 5056 | rbreak_command_wrapper (char *regexp, int from_tty) |
| 5057 | { |
| 5058 | rbreak_command (regexp, from_tty); |
| 5059 | } |
| 5060 | |
| 5061 | static void |
| 5062 | rbreak_command (const char *regexp, int from_tty) |
| 5063 | { |
| 5064 | std::string string; |
| 5065 | const char **files = NULL; |
| 5066 | const char *file_name; |
| 5067 | int nfiles = 0; |
| 5068 | |
| 5069 | if (regexp) |
| 5070 | { |
| 5071 | const char *colon = strchr (regexp, ':'); |
| 5072 | |
| 5073 | if (colon && *(colon + 1) != ':') |
| 5074 | { |
| 5075 | int colon_index; |
| 5076 | char *local_name; |
| 5077 | |
| 5078 | colon_index = colon - regexp; |
| 5079 | local_name = (char *) alloca (colon_index + 1); |
| 5080 | memcpy (local_name, regexp, colon_index); |
| 5081 | local_name[colon_index--] = 0; |
| 5082 | while (isspace (local_name[colon_index])) |
| 5083 | local_name[colon_index--] = 0; |
| 5084 | file_name = local_name; |
| 5085 | files = &file_name; |
| 5086 | nfiles = 1; |
| 5087 | regexp = skip_spaces (colon + 1); |
| 5088 | } |
| 5089 | } |
| 5090 | |
| 5091 | std::vector<symbol_search> symbols = search_symbols (regexp, |
| 5092 | FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN, |
| 5093 | NULL, |
| 5094 | nfiles, files, |
| 5095 | false); |
| 5096 | |
| 5097 | scoped_rbreak_breakpoints finalize; |
| 5098 | for (const symbol_search &p : symbols) |
| 5099 | { |
| 5100 | if (p.msymbol.minsym == NULL) |
| 5101 | { |
| 5102 | struct symtab *symtab = symbol_symtab (p.symbol); |
| 5103 | const char *fullname = symtab_to_fullname (symtab); |
| 5104 | |
| 5105 | string = string_printf ("%s:'%s'", fullname, |
| 5106 | SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (p.symbol)); |
| 5107 | break_command (&string[0], from_tty); |
| 5108 | print_symbol_info (FUNCTIONS_DOMAIN, p.symbol, p.block, NULL); |
| 5109 | } |
| 5110 | else |
| 5111 | { |
| 5112 | string = string_printf ("'%s'", |
| 5113 | MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (p.msymbol.minsym)); |
| 5114 | |
| 5115 | break_command (&string[0], from_tty); |
| 5116 | printf_filtered ("<function, no debug info> %s;\n", |
| 5117 | MSYMBOL_PRINT_NAME (p.msymbol.minsym)); |
| 5118 | } |
| 5119 | } |
| 5120 | } |
| 5121 | \f |
| 5122 | |
| 5123 | /* Evaluate if SYMNAME matches LOOKUP_NAME. */ |
| 5124 | |
| 5125 | static int |
| 5126 | compare_symbol_name (const char *symbol_name, language symbol_language, |
| 5127 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5128 | completion_match_result &match_res) |
| 5129 | { |
| 5130 | const language_defn *lang = language_def (symbol_language); |
| 5131 | |
| 5132 | symbol_name_matcher_ftype *name_match |
| 5133 | = get_symbol_name_matcher (lang, lookup_name); |
| 5134 | |
| 5135 | return name_match (symbol_name, lookup_name, &match_res); |
| 5136 | } |
| 5137 | |
| 5138 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 5139 | |
| 5140 | void |
| 5141 | completion_list_add_name (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5142 | language symbol_language, |
| 5143 | const char *symname, |
| 5144 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5145 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5146 | { |
| 5147 | completion_match_result &match_res |
| 5148 | = tracker.reset_completion_match_result (); |
| 5149 | |
| 5150 | /* Clip symbols that cannot match. */ |
| 5151 | if (!compare_symbol_name (symname, symbol_language, lookup_name, match_res)) |
| 5152 | return; |
| 5153 | |
| 5154 | /* Refresh SYMNAME from the match string. It's potentially |
| 5155 | different depending on language. (E.g., on Ada, the match may be |
| 5156 | the encoded symbol name wrapped in "<>"). */ |
| 5157 | symname = match_res.match.match (); |
| 5158 | gdb_assert (symname != NULL); |
| 5159 | |
| 5160 | /* We have a match for a completion, so add SYMNAME to the current list |
| 5161 | of matches. Note that the name is moved to freshly malloc'd space. */ |
| 5162 | |
| 5163 | { |
| 5164 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<char> completion |
| 5165 | = make_completion_match_str (symname, text, word); |
| 5166 | |
| 5167 | /* Here we pass the match-for-lcd object to add_completion. Some |
| 5168 | languages match the user text against substrings of symbol |
| 5169 | names in some cases. E.g., in C++, "b push_ba" completes to |
| 5170 | "std::vector::push_back", "std::string::push_back", etc., and |
| 5171 | in this case we want the completion lowest common denominator |
| 5172 | to be "push_back" instead of "std::". */ |
| 5173 | tracker.add_completion (std::move (completion), |
| 5174 | &match_res.match_for_lcd, text, word); |
| 5175 | } |
| 5176 | } |
| 5177 | |
| 5178 | /* completion_list_add_name wrapper for struct symbol. */ |
| 5179 | |
| 5180 | static void |
| 5181 | completion_list_add_symbol (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5182 | symbol *sym, |
| 5183 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5184 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5185 | { |
| 5186 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, SYMBOL_LANGUAGE (sym), |
| 5187 | SYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (sym), |
| 5188 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5189 | } |
| 5190 | |
| 5191 | /* completion_list_add_name wrapper for struct minimal_symbol. */ |
| 5192 | |
| 5193 | static void |
| 5194 | completion_list_add_msymbol (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5195 | minimal_symbol *sym, |
| 5196 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5197 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5198 | { |
| 5199 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, MSYMBOL_LANGUAGE (sym), |
| 5200 | MSYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (sym), |
| 5201 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5202 | } |
| 5203 | |
| 5204 | |
| 5205 | /* ObjC: In case we are completing on a selector, look as the msymbol |
| 5206 | again and feed all the selectors into the mill. */ |
| 5207 | |
| 5208 | static void |
| 5209 | completion_list_objc_symbol (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5210 | struct minimal_symbol *msymbol, |
| 5211 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5212 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5213 | { |
| 5214 | static char *tmp = NULL; |
| 5215 | static unsigned int tmplen = 0; |
| 5216 | |
| 5217 | const char *method, *category, *selector; |
| 5218 | char *tmp2 = NULL; |
| 5219 | |
| 5220 | method = MSYMBOL_NATURAL_NAME (msymbol); |
| 5221 | |
| 5222 | /* Is it a method? */ |
| 5223 | if ((method[0] != '-') && (method[0] != '+')) |
| 5224 | return; |
| 5225 | |
| 5226 | if (text[0] == '[') |
| 5227 | /* Complete on shortened method method. */ |
| 5228 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, language_objc, |
| 5229 | method + 1, |
| 5230 | lookup_name, |
| 5231 | text, word); |
| 5232 | |
| 5233 | while ((strlen (method) + 1) >= tmplen) |
| 5234 | { |
| 5235 | if (tmplen == 0) |
| 5236 | tmplen = 1024; |
| 5237 | else |
| 5238 | tmplen *= 2; |
| 5239 | tmp = (char *) xrealloc (tmp, tmplen); |
| 5240 | } |
| 5241 | selector = strchr (method, ' '); |
| 5242 | if (selector != NULL) |
| 5243 | selector++; |
| 5244 | |
| 5245 | category = strchr (method, '('); |
| 5246 | |
| 5247 | if ((category != NULL) && (selector != NULL)) |
| 5248 | { |
| 5249 | memcpy (tmp, method, (category - method)); |
| 5250 | tmp[category - method] = ' '; |
| 5251 | memcpy (tmp + (category - method) + 1, selector, strlen (selector) + 1); |
| 5252 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, language_objc, tmp, |
| 5253 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5254 | if (text[0] == '[') |
| 5255 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, language_objc, tmp + 1, |
| 5256 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5257 | } |
| 5258 | |
| 5259 | if (selector != NULL) |
| 5260 | { |
| 5261 | /* Complete on selector only. */ |
| 5262 | strcpy (tmp, selector); |
| 5263 | tmp2 = strchr (tmp, ']'); |
| 5264 | if (tmp2 != NULL) |
| 5265 | *tmp2 = '\0'; |
| 5266 | |
| 5267 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, language_objc, tmp, |
| 5268 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5269 | } |
| 5270 | } |
| 5271 | |
| 5272 | /* Break the non-quoted text based on the characters which are in |
| 5273 | symbols. FIXME: This should probably be language-specific. */ |
| 5274 | |
| 5275 | static const char * |
| 5276 | language_search_unquoted_string (const char *text, const char *p) |
| 5277 | { |
| 5278 | for (; p > text; --p) |
| 5279 | { |
| 5280 | if (isalnum (p[-1]) || p[-1] == '_' || p[-1] == '\0') |
| 5281 | continue; |
| 5282 | else |
| 5283 | { |
| 5284 | if ((current_language->la_language == language_objc)) |
| 5285 | { |
| 5286 | if (p[-1] == ':') /* Might be part of a method name. */ |
| 5287 | continue; |
| 5288 | else if (p[-1] == '[' && (p[-2] == '-' || p[-2] == '+')) |
| 5289 | p -= 2; /* Beginning of a method name. */ |
| 5290 | else if (p[-1] == ' ' || p[-1] == '(' || p[-1] == ')') |
| 5291 | { /* Might be part of a method name. */ |
| 5292 | const char *t = p; |
| 5293 | |
| 5294 | /* Seeing a ' ' or a '(' is not conclusive evidence |
| 5295 | that we are in the middle of a method name. However, |
| 5296 | finding "-[" or "+[" should be pretty un-ambiguous. |
| 5297 | Unfortunately we have to find it now to decide. */ |
| 5298 | |
| 5299 | while (t > text) |
| 5300 | if (isalnum (t[-1]) || t[-1] == '_' || |
| 5301 | t[-1] == ' ' || t[-1] == ':' || |
| 5302 | t[-1] == '(' || t[-1] == ')') |
| 5303 | --t; |
| 5304 | else |
| 5305 | break; |
| 5306 | |
| 5307 | if (t[-1] == '[' && (t[-2] == '-' || t[-2] == '+')) |
| 5308 | p = t - 2; /* Method name detected. */ |
| 5309 | /* Else we leave with p unchanged. */ |
| 5310 | } |
| 5311 | } |
| 5312 | break; |
| 5313 | } |
| 5314 | } |
| 5315 | return p; |
| 5316 | } |
| 5317 | |
| 5318 | static void |
| 5319 | completion_list_add_fields (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5320 | struct symbol *sym, |
| 5321 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5322 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5323 | { |
| 5324 | if (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_TYPEDEF) |
| 5325 | { |
| 5326 | struct type *t = SYMBOL_TYPE (sym); |
| 5327 | enum type_code c = TYPE_CODE (t); |
| 5328 | int j; |
| 5329 | |
| 5330 | if (c == TYPE_CODE_UNION || c == TYPE_CODE_STRUCT) |
| 5331 | for (j = TYPE_N_BASECLASSES (t); j < TYPE_NFIELDS (t); j++) |
| 5332 | if (TYPE_FIELD_NAME (t, j)) |
| 5333 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, SYMBOL_LANGUAGE (sym), |
| 5334 | TYPE_FIELD_NAME (t, j), |
| 5335 | lookup_name, text, word); |
| 5336 | } |
| 5337 | } |
| 5338 | |
| 5339 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 5340 | |
| 5341 | bool |
| 5342 | symbol_is_function_or_method (symbol *sym) |
| 5343 | { |
| 5344 | switch (TYPE_CODE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym))) |
| 5345 | { |
| 5346 | case TYPE_CODE_FUNC: |
| 5347 | case TYPE_CODE_METHOD: |
| 5348 | return true; |
| 5349 | default: |
| 5350 | return false; |
| 5351 | } |
| 5352 | } |
| 5353 | |
| 5354 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 5355 | |
| 5356 | bool |
| 5357 | symbol_is_function_or_method (minimal_symbol *msymbol) |
| 5358 | { |
| 5359 | switch (MSYMBOL_TYPE (msymbol)) |
| 5360 | { |
| 5361 | case mst_text: |
| 5362 | case mst_text_gnu_ifunc: |
| 5363 | case mst_solib_trampoline: |
| 5364 | case mst_file_text: |
| 5365 | return true; |
| 5366 | default: |
| 5367 | return false; |
| 5368 | } |
| 5369 | } |
| 5370 | |
| 5371 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 | bound_minimal_symbol |
| 5374 | find_gnu_ifunc (const symbol *sym) |
| 5375 | { |
| 5376 | if (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) != LOC_BLOCK) |
| 5377 | return {}; |
| 5378 | |
| 5379 | lookup_name_info lookup_name (SYMBOL_SEARCH_NAME (sym), |
| 5380 | symbol_name_match_type::SEARCH_NAME); |
| 5381 | struct objfile *objfile = symbol_objfile (sym); |
| 5382 | |
| 5383 | CORE_ADDR address = BLOCK_ENTRY_PC (SYMBOL_BLOCK_VALUE (sym)); |
| 5384 | minimal_symbol *ifunc = NULL; |
| 5385 | |
| 5386 | iterate_over_minimal_symbols (objfile, lookup_name, |
| 5387 | [&] (minimal_symbol *minsym) |
| 5388 | { |
| 5389 | if (MSYMBOL_TYPE (minsym) == mst_text_gnu_ifunc |
| 5390 | || MSYMBOL_TYPE (minsym) == mst_data_gnu_ifunc) |
| 5391 | { |
| 5392 | CORE_ADDR msym_addr = MSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (objfile, minsym); |
| 5393 | if (MSYMBOL_TYPE (minsym) == mst_data_gnu_ifunc) |
| 5394 | { |
| 5395 | struct gdbarch *gdbarch = get_objfile_arch (objfile); |
| 5396 | msym_addr |
| 5397 | = gdbarch_convert_from_func_ptr_addr (gdbarch, |
| 5398 | msym_addr, |
| 5399 | current_top_target ()); |
| 5400 | } |
| 5401 | if (msym_addr == address) |
| 5402 | { |
| 5403 | ifunc = minsym; |
| 5404 | return true; |
| 5405 | } |
| 5406 | } |
| 5407 | return false; |
| 5408 | }); |
| 5409 | |
| 5410 | if (ifunc != NULL) |
| 5411 | return {ifunc, objfile}; |
| 5412 | return {}; |
| 5413 | } |
| 5414 | |
| 5415 | /* Add matching symbols from SYMTAB to the current completion list. */ |
| 5416 | |
| 5417 | static void |
| 5418 | add_symtab_completions (struct compunit_symtab *cust, |
| 5419 | completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5420 | complete_symbol_mode mode, |
| 5421 | const lookup_name_info &lookup_name, |
| 5422 | const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5423 | enum type_code code) |
| 5424 | { |
| 5425 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 5426 | const struct block *b; |
| 5427 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 5428 | int i; |
| 5429 | |
| 5430 | if (cust == NULL) |
| 5431 | return; |
| 5432 | |
| 5433 | for (i = GLOBAL_BLOCK; i <= STATIC_BLOCK; i++) |
| 5434 | { |
| 5435 | QUIT; |
| 5436 | b = BLOCKVECTOR_BLOCK (COMPUNIT_BLOCKVECTOR (cust), i); |
| 5437 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (b, iter, sym) |
| 5438 | { |
| 5439 | if (completion_skip_symbol (mode, sym)) |
| 5440 | continue; |
| 5441 | |
| 5442 | if (code == TYPE_CODE_UNDEF |
| 5443 | || (SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym) == STRUCT_DOMAIN |
| 5444 | && TYPE_CODE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym)) == code)) |
| 5445 | completion_list_add_symbol (tracker, sym, |
| 5446 | lookup_name, |
| 5447 | text, word); |
| 5448 | } |
| 5449 | } |
| 5450 | } |
| 5451 | |
| 5452 | void |
| 5453 | default_collect_symbol_completion_matches_break_on |
| 5454 | (completion_tracker &tracker, complete_symbol_mode mode, |
| 5455 | symbol_name_match_type name_match_type, |
| 5456 | const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5457 | const char *break_on, enum type_code code) |
| 5458 | { |
| 5459 | /* Problem: All of the symbols have to be copied because readline |
| 5460 | frees them. I'm not going to worry about this; hopefully there |
| 5461 | won't be that many. */ |
| 5462 | |
| 5463 | struct symbol *sym; |
| 5464 | const struct block *b; |
| 5465 | const struct block *surrounding_static_block, *surrounding_global_block; |
| 5466 | struct block_iterator iter; |
| 5467 | /* The symbol we are completing on. Points in same buffer as text. */ |
| 5468 | const char *sym_text; |
| 5469 | |
| 5470 | /* Now look for the symbol we are supposed to complete on. */ |
| 5471 | if (mode == complete_symbol_mode::LINESPEC) |
| 5472 | sym_text = text; |
| 5473 | else |
| 5474 | { |
| 5475 | const char *p; |
| 5476 | char quote_found; |
| 5477 | const char *quote_pos = NULL; |
| 5478 | |
| 5479 | /* First see if this is a quoted string. */ |
| 5480 | quote_found = '\0'; |
| 5481 | for (p = text; *p != '\0'; ++p) |
| 5482 | { |
| 5483 | if (quote_found != '\0') |
| 5484 | { |
| 5485 | if (*p == quote_found) |
| 5486 | /* Found close quote. */ |
| 5487 | quote_found = '\0'; |
| 5488 | else if (*p == '\\' && p[1] == quote_found) |
| 5489 | /* A backslash followed by the quote character |
| 5490 | doesn't end the string. */ |
| 5491 | ++p; |
| 5492 | } |
| 5493 | else if (*p == '\'' || *p == '"') |
| 5494 | { |
| 5495 | quote_found = *p; |
| 5496 | quote_pos = p; |
| 5497 | } |
| 5498 | } |
| 5499 | if (quote_found == '\'') |
| 5500 | /* A string within single quotes can be a symbol, so complete on it. */ |
| 5501 | sym_text = quote_pos + 1; |
| 5502 | else if (quote_found == '"') |
| 5503 | /* A double-quoted string is never a symbol, nor does it make sense |
| 5504 | to complete it any other way. */ |
| 5505 | { |
| 5506 | return; |
| 5507 | } |
| 5508 | else |
| 5509 | { |
| 5510 | /* It is not a quoted string. Break it based on the characters |
| 5511 | which are in symbols. */ |
| 5512 | while (p > text) |
| 5513 | { |
| 5514 | if (isalnum (p[-1]) || p[-1] == '_' || p[-1] == '\0' |
| 5515 | || p[-1] == ':' || strchr (break_on, p[-1]) != NULL) |
| 5516 | --p; |
| 5517 | else |
| 5518 | break; |
| 5519 | } |
| 5520 | sym_text = p; |
| 5521 | } |
| 5522 | } |
| 5523 | |
| 5524 | lookup_name_info lookup_name (sym_text, name_match_type, true); |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 | /* At this point scan through the misc symbol vectors and add each |
| 5527 | symbol you find to the list. Eventually we want to ignore |
| 5528 | anything that isn't a text symbol (everything else will be |
| 5529 | handled by the psymtab code below). */ |
| 5530 | |
| 5531 | if (code == TYPE_CODE_UNDEF) |
| 5532 | { |
| 5533 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 5534 | { |
| 5535 | for (minimal_symbol *msymbol : objfile->msymbols ()) |
| 5536 | { |
| 5537 | QUIT; |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 | if (completion_skip_symbol (mode, msymbol)) |
| 5540 | continue; |
| 5541 | |
| 5542 | completion_list_add_msymbol (tracker, msymbol, lookup_name, |
| 5543 | sym_text, word); |
| 5544 | |
| 5545 | completion_list_objc_symbol (tracker, msymbol, lookup_name, |
| 5546 | sym_text, word); |
| 5547 | } |
| 5548 | } |
| 5549 | } |
| 5550 | |
| 5551 | /* Add completions for all currently loaded symbol tables. */ |
| 5552 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 5553 | { |
| 5554 | for (compunit_symtab *cust : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 5555 | add_symtab_completions (cust, tracker, mode, lookup_name, |
| 5556 | sym_text, word, code); |
| 5557 | } |
| 5558 | |
| 5559 | /* Look through the partial symtabs for all symbols which begin by |
| 5560 | matching SYM_TEXT. Expand all CUs that you find to the list. */ |
| 5561 | expand_symtabs_matching (NULL, |
| 5562 | lookup_name, |
| 5563 | NULL, |
| 5564 | [&] (compunit_symtab *symtab) /* expansion notify */ |
| 5565 | { |
| 5566 | add_symtab_completions (symtab, |
| 5567 | tracker, mode, lookup_name, |
| 5568 | sym_text, word, code); |
| 5569 | }, |
| 5570 | ALL_DOMAIN); |
| 5571 | |
| 5572 | /* Search upwards from currently selected frame (so that we can |
| 5573 | complete on local vars). Also catch fields of types defined in |
| 5574 | this places which match our text string. Only complete on types |
| 5575 | visible from current context. */ |
| 5576 | |
| 5577 | b = get_selected_block (0); |
| 5578 | surrounding_static_block = block_static_block (b); |
| 5579 | surrounding_global_block = block_global_block (b); |
| 5580 | if (surrounding_static_block != NULL) |
| 5581 | while (b != surrounding_static_block) |
| 5582 | { |
| 5583 | QUIT; |
| 5584 | |
| 5585 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (b, iter, sym) |
| 5586 | { |
| 5587 | if (code == TYPE_CODE_UNDEF) |
| 5588 | { |
| 5589 | completion_list_add_symbol (tracker, sym, lookup_name, |
| 5590 | sym_text, word); |
| 5591 | completion_list_add_fields (tracker, sym, lookup_name, |
| 5592 | sym_text, word); |
| 5593 | } |
| 5594 | else if (SYMBOL_DOMAIN (sym) == STRUCT_DOMAIN |
| 5595 | && TYPE_CODE (SYMBOL_TYPE (sym)) == code) |
| 5596 | completion_list_add_symbol (tracker, sym, lookup_name, |
| 5597 | sym_text, word); |
| 5598 | } |
| 5599 | |
| 5600 | /* Stop when we encounter an enclosing function. Do not stop for |
| 5601 | non-inlined functions - the locals of the enclosing function |
| 5602 | are in scope for a nested function. */ |
| 5603 | if (BLOCK_FUNCTION (b) != NULL && block_inlined_p (b)) |
| 5604 | break; |
| 5605 | b = BLOCK_SUPERBLOCK (b); |
| 5606 | } |
| 5607 | |
| 5608 | /* Add fields from the file's types; symbols will be added below. */ |
| 5609 | |
| 5610 | if (code == TYPE_CODE_UNDEF) |
| 5611 | { |
| 5612 | if (surrounding_static_block != NULL) |
| 5613 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (surrounding_static_block, iter, sym) |
| 5614 | completion_list_add_fields (tracker, sym, lookup_name, |
| 5615 | sym_text, word); |
| 5616 | |
| 5617 | if (surrounding_global_block != NULL) |
| 5618 | ALL_BLOCK_SYMBOLS (surrounding_global_block, iter, sym) |
| 5619 | completion_list_add_fields (tracker, sym, lookup_name, |
| 5620 | sym_text, word); |
| 5621 | } |
| 5622 | |
| 5623 | /* Skip macros if we are completing a struct tag -- arguable but |
| 5624 | usually what is expected. */ |
| 5625 | if (current_language->la_macro_expansion == macro_expansion_c |
| 5626 | && code == TYPE_CODE_UNDEF) |
| 5627 | { |
| 5628 | gdb::unique_xmalloc_ptr<struct macro_scope> scope; |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 | /* This adds a macro's name to the current completion list. */ |
| 5631 | auto add_macro_name = [&] (const char *macro_name, |
| 5632 | const macro_definition *, |
| 5633 | macro_source_file *, |
| 5634 | int) |
| 5635 | { |
| 5636 | completion_list_add_name (tracker, language_c, macro_name, |
| 5637 | lookup_name, sym_text, word); |
| 5638 | }; |
| 5639 | |
| 5640 | /* Add any macros visible in the default scope. Note that this |
| 5641 | may yield the occasional wrong result, because an expression |
| 5642 | might be evaluated in a scope other than the default. For |
| 5643 | example, if the user types "break file:line if <TAB>", the |
| 5644 | resulting expression will be evaluated at "file:line" -- but |
| 5645 | at there does not seem to be a way to detect this at |
| 5646 | completion time. */ |
| 5647 | scope = default_macro_scope (); |
| 5648 | if (scope) |
| 5649 | macro_for_each_in_scope (scope->file, scope->line, |
| 5650 | add_macro_name); |
| 5651 | |
| 5652 | /* User-defined macros are always visible. */ |
| 5653 | macro_for_each (macro_user_macros, add_macro_name); |
| 5654 | } |
| 5655 | } |
| 5656 | |
| 5657 | void |
| 5658 | default_collect_symbol_completion_matches (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5659 | complete_symbol_mode mode, |
| 5660 | symbol_name_match_type name_match_type, |
| 5661 | const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5662 | enum type_code code) |
| 5663 | { |
| 5664 | return default_collect_symbol_completion_matches_break_on (tracker, mode, |
| 5665 | name_match_type, |
| 5666 | text, word, "", |
| 5667 | code); |
| 5668 | } |
| 5669 | |
| 5670 | /* Collect all symbols (regardless of class) which begin by matching |
| 5671 | TEXT. */ |
| 5672 | |
| 5673 | void |
| 5674 | collect_symbol_completion_matches (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5675 | complete_symbol_mode mode, |
| 5676 | symbol_name_match_type name_match_type, |
| 5677 | const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5678 | { |
| 5679 | current_language->la_collect_symbol_completion_matches (tracker, mode, |
| 5680 | name_match_type, |
| 5681 | text, word, |
| 5682 | TYPE_CODE_UNDEF); |
| 5683 | } |
| 5684 | |
| 5685 | /* Like collect_symbol_completion_matches, but only collect |
| 5686 | STRUCT_DOMAIN symbols whose type code is CODE. */ |
| 5687 | |
| 5688 | void |
| 5689 | collect_symbol_completion_matches_type (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5690 | const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5691 | enum type_code code) |
| 5692 | { |
| 5693 | complete_symbol_mode mode = complete_symbol_mode::EXPRESSION; |
| 5694 | symbol_name_match_type name_match_type = symbol_name_match_type::EXPRESSION; |
| 5695 | |
| 5696 | gdb_assert (code == TYPE_CODE_UNION |
| 5697 | || code == TYPE_CODE_STRUCT |
| 5698 | || code == TYPE_CODE_ENUM); |
| 5699 | current_language->la_collect_symbol_completion_matches (tracker, mode, |
| 5700 | name_match_type, |
| 5701 | text, word, code); |
| 5702 | } |
| 5703 | |
| 5704 | /* Like collect_symbol_completion_matches, but collects a list of |
| 5705 | symbols defined in all source files named SRCFILE. */ |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 | void |
| 5708 | collect_file_symbol_completion_matches (completion_tracker &tracker, |
| 5709 | complete_symbol_mode mode, |
| 5710 | symbol_name_match_type name_match_type, |
| 5711 | const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5712 | const char *srcfile) |
| 5713 | { |
| 5714 | /* The symbol we are completing on. Points in same buffer as text. */ |
| 5715 | const char *sym_text; |
| 5716 | |
| 5717 | /* Now look for the symbol we are supposed to complete on. |
| 5718 | FIXME: This should be language-specific. */ |
| 5719 | if (mode == complete_symbol_mode::LINESPEC) |
| 5720 | sym_text = text; |
| 5721 | else |
| 5722 | { |
| 5723 | const char *p; |
| 5724 | char quote_found; |
| 5725 | const char *quote_pos = NULL; |
| 5726 | |
| 5727 | /* First see if this is a quoted string. */ |
| 5728 | quote_found = '\0'; |
| 5729 | for (p = text; *p != '\0'; ++p) |
| 5730 | { |
| 5731 | if (quote_found != '\0') |
| 5732 | { |
| 5733 | if (*p == quote_found) |
| 5734 | /* Found close quote. */ |
| 5735 | quote_found = '\0'; |
| 5736 | else if (*p == '\\' && p[1] == quote_found) |
| 5737 | /* A backslash followed by the quote character |
| 5738 | doesn't end the string. */ |
| 5739 | ++p; |
| 5740 | } |
| 5741 | else if (*p == '\'' || *p == '"') |
| 5742 | { |
| 5743 | quote_found = *p; |
| 5744 | quote_pos = p; |
| 5745 | } |
| 5746 | } |
| 5747 | if (quote_found == '\'') |
| 5748 | /* A string within single quotes can be a symbol, so complete on it. */ |
| 5749 | sym_text = quote_pos + 1; |
| 5750 | else if (quote_found == '"') |
| 5751 | /* A double-quoted string is never a symbol, nor does it make sense |
| 5752 | to complete it any other way. */ |
| 5753 | { |
| 5754 | return; |
| 5755 | } |
| 5756 | else |
| 5757 | { |
| 5758 | /* Not a quoted string. */ |
| 5759 | sym_text = language_search_unquoted_string (text, p); |
| 5760 | } |
| 5761 | } |
| 5762 | |
| 5763 | lookup_name_info lookup_name (sym_text, name_match_type, true); |
| 5764 | |
| 5765 | /* Go through symtabs for SRCFILE and check the externs and statics |
| 5766 | for symbols which match. */ |
| 5767 | iterate_over_symtabs (srcfile, [&] (symtab *s) |
| 5768 | { |
| 5769 | add_symtab_completions (SYMTAB_COMPUNIT (s), |
| 5770 | tracker, mode, lookup_name, |
| 5771 | sym_text, word, TYPE_CODE_UNDEF); |
| 5772 | return false; |
| 5773 | }); |
| 5774 | } |
| 5775 | |
| 5776 | /* A helper function for make_source_files_completion_list. It adds |
| 5777 | another file name to a list of possible completions, growing the |
| 5778 | list as necessary. */ |
| 5779 | |
| 5780 | static void |
| 5781 | add_filename_to_list (const char *fname, const char *text, const char *word, |
| 5782 | completion_list *list) |
| 5783 | { |
| 5784 | list->emplace_back (make_completion_match_str (fname, text, word)); |
| 5785 | } |
| 5786 | |
| 5787 | static int |
| 5788 | not_interesting_fname (const char *fname) |
| 5789 | { |
| 5790 | static const char *illegal_aliens[] = { |
| 5791 | "_globals_", /* inserted by coff_symtab_read */ |
| 5792 | NULL |
| 5793 | }; |
| 5794 | int i; |
| 5795 | |
| 5796 | for (i = 0; illegal_aliens[i]; i++) |
| 5797 | { |
| 5798 | if (filename_cmp (fname, illegal_aliens[i]) == 0) |
| 5799 | return 1; |
| 5800 | } |
| 5801 | return 0; |
| 5802 | } |
| 5803 | |
| 5804 | /* An object of this type is passed as the user_data argument to |
| 5805 | map_partial_symbol_filenames. */ |
| 5806 | struct add_partial_filename_data |
| 5807 | { |
| 5808 | struct filename_seen_cache *filename_seen_cache; |
| 5809 | const char *text; |
| 5810 | const char *word; |
| 5811 | int text_len; |
| 5812 | completion_list *list; |
| 5813 | }; |
| 5814 | |
| 5815 | /* A callback for map_partial_symbol_filenames. */ |
| 5816 | |
| 5817 | static void |
| 5818 | maybe_add_partial_symtab_filename (const char *filename, const char *fullname, |
| 5819 | void *user_data) |
| 5820 | { |
| 5821 | struct add_partial_filename_data *data |
| 5822 | = (struct add_partial_filename_data *) user_data; |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 | if (not_interesting_fname (filename)) |
| 5825 | return; |
| 5826 | if (!data->filename_seen_cache->seen (filename) |
| 5827 | && filename_ncmp (filename, data->text, data->text_len) == 0) |
| 5828 | { |
| 5829 | /* This file matches for a completion; add it to the |
| 5830 | current list of matches. */ |
| 5831 | add_filename_to_list (filename, data->text, data->word, data->list); |
| 5832 | } |
| 5833 | else |
| 5834 | { |
| 5835 | const char *base_name = lbasename (filename); |
| 5836 | |
| 5837 | if (base_name != filename |
| 5838 | && !data->filename_seen_cache->seen (base_name) |
| 5839 | && filename_ncmp (base_name, data->text, data->text_len) == 0) |
| 5840 | add_filename_to_list (base_name, data->text, data->word, data->list); |
| 5841 | } |
| 5842 | } |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 | /* Return a list of all source files whose names begin with matching |
| 5845 | TEXT. The file names are looked up in the symbol tables of this |
| 5846 | program. */ |
| 5847 | |
| 5848 | completion_list |
| 5849 | make_source_files_completion_list (const char *text, const char *word) |
| 5850 | { |
| 5851 | size_t text_len = strlen (text); |
| 5852 | completion_list list; |
| 5853 | const char *base_name; |
| 5854 | struct add_partial_filename_data datum; |
| 5855 | |
| 5856 | if (!have_full_symbols () && !have_partial_symbols ()) |
| 5857 | return list; |
| 5858 | |
| 5859 | filename_seen_cache filenames_seen; |
| 5860 | |
| 5861 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 5862 | { |
| 5863 | for (compunit_symtab *cu : objfile->compunits ()) |
| 5864 | { |
| 5865 | for (symtab *s : compunit_filetabs (cu)) |
| 5866 | { |
| 5867 | if (not_interesting_fname (s->filename)) |
| 5868 | continue; |
| 5869 | if (!filenames_seen.seen (s->filename) |
| 5870 | && filename_ncmp (s->filename, text, text_len) == 0) |
| 5871 | { |
| 5872 | /* This file matches for a completion; add it to the current |
| 5873 | list of matches. */ |
| 5874 | add_filename_to_list (s->filename, text, word, &list); |
| 5875 | } |
| 5876 | else |
| 5877 | { |
| 5878 | /* NOTE: We allow the user to type a base name when the |
| 5879 | debug info records leading directories, but not the other |
| 5880 | way around. This is what subroutines of breakpoint |
| 5881 | command do when they parse file names. */ |
| 5882 | base_name = lbasename (s->filename); |
| 5883 | if (base_name != s->filename |
| 5884 | && !filenames_seen.seen (base_name) |
| 5885 | && filename_ncmp (base_name, text, text_len) == 0) |
| 5886 | add_filename_to_list (base_name, text, word, &list); |
| 5887 | } |
| 5888 | } |
| 5889 | } |
| 5890 | } |
| 5891 | |
| 5892 | datum.filename_seen_cache = &filenames_seen; |
| 5893 | datum.text = text; |
| 5894 | datum.word = word; |
| 5895 | datum.text_len = text_len; |
| 5896 | datum.list = &list; |
| 5897 | map_symbol_filenames (maybe_add_partial_symtab_filename, &datum, |
| 5898 | 0 /*need_fullname*/); |
| 5899 | |
| 5900 | return list; |
| 5901 | } |
| 5902 | \f |
| 5903 | /* Track MAIN */ |
| 5904 | |
| 5905 | /* Return the "main_info" object for the current program space. If |
| 5906 | the object has not yet been created, create it and fill in some |
| 5907 | default values. */ |
| 5908 | |
| 5909 | static struct main_info * |
| 5910 | get_main_info (void) |
| 5911 | { |
| 5912 | struct main_info *info = main_progspace_key.get (current_program_space); |
| 5913 | |
| 5914 | if (info == NULL) |
| 5915 | { |
| 5916 | /* It may seem strange to store the main name in the progspace |
| 5917 | and also in whatever objfile happens to see a main name in |
| 5918 | its debug info. The reason for this is mainly historical: |
| 5919 | gdb returned "main" as the name even if no function named |
| 5920 | "main" was defined the program; and this approach lets us |
| 5921 | keep compatibility. */ |
| 5922 | info = main_progspace_key.emplace (current_program_space); |
| 5923 | } |
| 5924 | |
| 5925 | return info; |
| 5926 | } |
| 5927 | |
| 5928 | static void |
| 5929 | set_main_name (const char *name, enum language lang) |
| 5930 | { |
| 5931 | struct main_info *info = get_main_info (); |
| 5932 | |
| 5933 | if (info->name_of_main != NULL) |
| 5934 | { |
| 5935 | xfree (info->name_of_main); |
| 5936 | info->name_of_main = NULL; |
| 5937 | info->language_of_main = language_unknown; |
| 5938 | } |
| 5939 | if (name != NULL) |
| 5940 | { |
| 5941 | info->name_of_main = xstrdup (name); |
| 5942 | info->language_of_main = lang; |
| 5943 | } |
| 5944 | } |
| 5945 | |
| 5946 | /* Deduce the name of the main procedure, and set NAME_OF_MAIN |
| 5947 | accordingly. */ |
| 5948 | |
| 5949 | static void |
| 5950 | find_main_name (void) |
| 5951 | { |
| 5952 | const char *new_main_name; |
| 5953 | |
| 5954 | /* First check the objfiles to see whether a debuginfo reader has |
| 5955 | picked up the appropriate main name. Historically the main name |
| 5956 | was found in a more or less random way; this approach instead |
| 5957 | relies on the order of objfile creation -- which still isn't |
| 5958 | guaranteed to get the correct answer, but is just probably more |
| 5959 | accurate. */ |
| 5960 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 5961 | { |
| 5962 | if (objfile->per_bfd->name_of_main != NULL) |
| 5963 | { |
| 5964 | set_main_name (objfile->per_bfd->name_of_main, |
| 5965 | objfile->per_bfd->language_of_main); |
| 5966 | return; |
| 5967 | } |
| 5968 | } |
| 5969 | |
| 5970 | /* Try to see if the main procedure is in Ada. */ |
| 5971 | /* FIXME: brobecker/2005-03-07: Another way of doing this would |
| 5972 | be to add a new method in the language vector, and call this |
| 5973 | method for each language until one of them returns a non-empty |
| 5974 | name. This would allow us to remove this hard-coded call to |
| 5975 | an Ada function. It is not clear that this is a better approach |
| 5976 | at this point, because all methods need to be written in a way |
| 5977 | such that false positives never be returned. For instance, it is |
| 5978 | important that a method does not return a wrong name for the main |
| 5979 | procedure if the main procedure is actually written in a different |
| 5980 | language. It is easy to guaranty this with Ada, since we use a |
| 5981 | special symbol generated only when the main in Ada to find the name |
| 5982 | of the main procedure. It is difficult however to see how this can |
| 5983 | be guarantied for languages such as C, for instance. This suggests |
| 5984 | that order of call for these methods becomes important, which means |
| 5985 | a more complicated approach. */ |
| 5986 | new_main_name = ada_main_name (); |
| 5987 | if (new_main_name != NULL) |
| 5988 | { |
| 5989 | set_main_name (new_main_name, language_ada); |
| 5990 | return; |
| 5991 | } |
| 5992 | |
| 5993 | new_main_name = d_main_name (); |
| 5994 | if (new_main_name != NULL) |
| 5995 | { |
| 5996 | set_main_name (new_main_name, language_d); |
| 5997 | return; |
| 5998 | } |
| 5999 | |
| 6000 | new_main_name = go_main_name (); |
| 6001 | if (new_main_name != NULL) |
| 6002 | { |
| 6003 | set_main_name (new_main_name, language_go); |
| 6004 | return; |
| 6005 | } |
| 6006 | |
| 6007 | new_main_name = pascal_main_name (); |
| 6008 | if (new_main_name != NULL) |
| 6009 | { |
| 6010 | set_main_name (new_main_name, language_pascal); |
| 6011 | return; |
| 6012 | } |
| 6013 | |
| 6014 | /* The languages above didn't identify the name of the main procedure. |
| 6015 | Fallback to "main". */ |
| 6016 | set_main_name ("main", language_unknown); |
| 6017 | } |
| 6018 | |
| 6019 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6020 | |
| 6021 | const char * |
| 6022 | main_name () |
| 6023 | { |
| 6024 | struct main_info *info = get_main_info (); |
| 6025 | |
| 6026 | if (info->name_of_main == NULL) |
| 6027 | find_main_name (); |
| 6028 | |
| 6029 | return info->name_of_main; |
| 6030 | } |
| 6031 | |
| 6032 | /* Return the language of the main function. If it is not known, |
| 6033 | return language_unknown. */ |
| 6034 | |
| 6035 | enum language |
| 6036 | main_language (void) |
| 6037 | { |
| 6038 | struct main_info *info = get_main_info (); |
| 6039 | |
| 6040 | if (info->name_of_main == NULL) |
| 6041 | find_main_name (); |
| 6042 | |
| 6043 | return info->language_of_main; |
| 6044 | } |
| 6045 | |
| 6046 | /* Handle ``executable_changed'' events for the symtab module. */ |
| 6047 | |
| 6048 | static void |
| 6049 | symtab_observer_executable_changed (void) |
| 6050 | { |
| 6051 | /* NAME_OF_MAIN may no longer be the same, so reset it for now. */ |
| 6052 | set_main_name (NULL, language_unknown); |
| 6053 | } |
| 6054 | |
| 6055 | /* Return 1 if the supplied producer string matches the ARM RealView |
| 6056 | compiler (armcc). */ |
| 6057 | |
| 6058 | bool |
| 6059 | producer_is_realview (const char *producer) |
| 6060 | { |
| 6061 | static const char *const arm_idents[] = { |
| 6062 | "ARM C Compiler, ADS", |
| 6063 | "Thumb C Compiler, ADS", |
| 6064 | "ARM C++ Compiler, ADS", |
| 6065 | "Thumb C++ Compiler, ADS", |
| 6066 | "ARM/Thumb C/C++ Compiler, RVCT", |
| 6067 | "ARM C/C++ Compiler, RVCT" |
| 6068 | }; |
| 6069 | int i; |
| 6070 | |
| 6071 | if (producer == NULL) |
| 6072 | return false; |
| 6073 | |
| 6074 | for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE (arm_idents); i++) |
| 6075 | if (startswith (producer, arm_idents[i])) |
| 6076 | return true; |
| 6077 | |
| 6078 | return false; |
| 6079 | } |
| 6080 | |
| 6081 | \f |
| 6082 | |
| 6083 | /* The next index to hand out in response to a registration request. */ |
| 6084 | |
| 6085 | static int next_aclass_value = LOC_FINAL_VALUE; |
| 6086 | |
| 6087 | /* The maximum number of "aclass" registrations we support. This is |
| 6088 | constant for convenience. */ |
| 6089 | #define MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS (LOC_FINAL_VALUE + 10) |
| 6090 | |
| 6091 | /* The objects representing the various "aclass" values. The elements |
| 6092 | from 0 up to LOC_FINAL_VALUE-1 represent themselves, and subsequent |
| 6093 | elements are those registered at gdb initialization time. */ |
| 6094 | |
| 6095 | static struct symbol_impl symbol_impl[MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS]; |
| 6096 | |
| 6097 | /* The globally visible pointer. This is separate from 'symbol_impl' |
| 6098 | so that it can be const. */ |
| 6099 | |
| 6100 | const struct symbol_impl *symbol_impls = &symbol_impl[0]; |
| 6101 | |
| 6102 | /* Make sure we saved enough room in struct symbol. */ |
| 6103 | |
| 6104 | gdb_static_assert (MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS <= (1 << SYMBOL_ACLASS_BITS)); |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 | /* Register a computed symbol type. ACLASS must be LOC_COMPUTED. OPS |
| 6107 | is the ops vector associated with this index. This returns the new |
| 6108 | index, which should be used as the aclass_index field for symbols |
| 6109 | of this type. */ |
| 6110 | |
| 6111 | int |
| 6112 | register_symbol_computed_impl (enum address_class aclass, |
| 6113 | const struct symbol_computed_ops *ops) |
| 6114 | { |
| 6115 | int result = next_aclass_value++; |
| 6116 | |
| 6117 | gdb_assert (aclass == LOC_COMPUTED); |
| 6118 | gdb_assert (result < MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS); |
| 6119 | symbol_impl[result].aclass = aclass; |
| 6120 | symbol_impl[result].ops_computed = ops; |
| 6121 | |
| 6122 | /* Sanity check OPS. */ |
| 6123 | gdb_assert (ops != NULL); |
| 6124 | gdb_assert (ops->tracepoint_var_ref != NULL); |
| 6125 | gdb_assert (ops->describe_location != NULL); |
| 6126 | gdb_assert (ops->get_symbol_read_needs != NULL); |
| 6127 | gdb_assert (ops->read_variable != NULL); |
| 6128 | |
| 6129 | return result; |
| 6130 | } |
| 6131 | |
| 6132 | /* Register a function with frame base type. ACLASS must be LOC_BLOCK. |
| 6133 | OPS is the ops vector associated with this index. This returns the |
| 6134 | new index, which should be used as the aclass_index field for symbols |
| 6135 | of this type. */ |
| 6136 | |
| 6137 | int |
| 6138 | register_symbol_block_impl (enum address_class aclass, |
| 6139 | const struct symbol_block_ops *ops) |
| 6140 | { |
| 6141 | int result = next_aclass_value++; |
| 6142 | |
| 6143 | gdb_assert (aclass == LOC_BLOCK); |
| 6144 | gdb_assert (result < MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS); |
| 6145 | symbol_impl[result].aclass = aclass; |
| 6146 | symbol_impl[result].ops_block = ops; |
| 6147 | |
| 6148 | /* Sanity check OPS. */ |
| 6149 | gdb_assert (ops != NULL); |
| 6150 | gdb_assert (ops->find_frame_base_location != NULL); |
| 6151 | |
| 6152 | return result; |
| 6153 | } |
| 6154 | |
| 6155 | /* Register a register symbol type. ACLASS must be LOC_REGISTER or |
| 6156 | LOC_REGPARM_ADDR. OPS is the register ops vector associated with |
| 6157 | this index. This returns the new index, which should be used as |
| 6158 | the aclass_index field for symbols of this type. */ |
| 6159 | |
| 6160 | int |
| 6161 | register_symbol_register_impl (enum address_class aclass, |
| 6162 | const struct symbol_register_ops *ops) |
| 6163 | { |
| 6164 | int result = next_aclass_value++; |
| 6165 | |
| 6166 | gdb_assert (aclass == LOC_REGISTER || aclass == LOC_REGPARM_ADDR); |
| 6167 | gdb_assert (result < MAX_SYMBOL_IMPLS); |
| 6168 | symbol_impl[result].aclass = aclass; |
| 6169 | symbol_impl[result].ops_register = ops; |
| 6170 | |
| 6171 | return result; |
| 6172 | } |
| 6173 | |
| 6174 | /* Initialize elements of 'symbol_impl' for the constants in enum |
| 6175 | address_class. */ |
| 6176 | |
| 6177 | static void |
| 6178 | initialize_ordinary_address_classes (void) |
| 6179 | { |
| 6180 | int i; |
| 6181 | |
| 6182 | for (i = 0; i < LOC_FINAL_VALUE; ++i) |
| 6183 | symbol_impl[i].aclass = (enum address_class) i; |
| 6184 | } |
| 6185 | |
| 6186 | \f |
| 6187 | |
| 6188 | /* Helper function to initialize the fields of an objfile-owned symbol. |
| 6189 | It assumed that *SYM is already all zeroes. */ |
| 6190 | |
| 6191 | static void |
| 6192 | initialize_objfile_symbol_1 (struct symbol *sym) |
| 6193 | { |
| 6194 | SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (sym) = 1; |
| 6195 | SYMBOL_SECTION (sym) = -1; |
| 6196 | } |
| 6197 | |
| 6198 | /* Initialize the symbol SYM, and mark it as being owned by an objfile. */ |
| 6199 | |
| 6200 | void |
| 6201 | initialize_objfile_symbol (struct symbol *sym) |
| 6202 | { |
| 6203 | memset (sym, 0, sizeof (*sym)); |
| 6204 | initialize_objfile_symbol_1 (sym); |
| 6205 | } |
| 6206 | |
| 6207 | /* Allocate and initialize a new 'struct symbol' on OBJFILE's |
| 6208 | obstack. */ |
| 6209 | |
| 6210 | struct symbol * |
| 6211 | allocate_symbol (struct objfile *objfile) |
| 6212 | { |
| 6213 | struct symbol *result; |
| 6214 | |
| 6215 | result = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (&objfile->objfile_obstack, struct symbol); |
| 6216 | initialize_objfile_symbol_1 (result); |
| 6217 | |
| 6218 | return result; |
| 6219 | } |
| 6220 | |
| 6221 | /* Allocate and initialize a new 'struct template_symbol' on OBJFILE's |
| 6222 | obstack. */ |
| 6223 | |
| 6224 | struct template_symbol * |
| 6225 | allocate_template_symbol (struct objfile *objfile) |
| 6226 | { |
| 6227 | struct template_symbol *result; |
| 6228 | |
| 6229 | result = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (&objfile->objfile_obstack, struct template_symbol); |
| 6230 | initialize_objfile_symbol_1 (result); |
| 6231 | |
| 6232 | return result; |
| 6233 | } |
| 6234 | |
| 6235 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6236 | |
| 6237 | struct objfile * |
| 6238 | symbol_objfile (const struct symbol *symbol) |
| 6239 | { |
| 6240 | gdb_assert (SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (symbol)); |
| 6241 | return SYMTAB_OBJFILE (symbol->owner.symtab); |
| 6242 | } |
| 6243 | |
| 6244 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6245 | |
| 6246 | struct gdbarch * |
| 6247 | symbol_arch (const struct symbol *symbol) |
| 6248 | { |
| 6249 | if (!SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (symbol)) |
| 6250 | return symbol->owner.arch; |
| 6251 | return get_objfile_arch (SYMTAB_OBJFILE (symbol->owner.symtab)); |
| 6252 | } |
| 6253 | |
| 6254 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6255 | |
| 6256 | struct symtab * |
| 6257 | symbol_symtab (const struct symbol *symbol) |
| 6258 | { |
| 6259 | gdb_assert (SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (symbol)); |
| 6260 | return symbol->owner.symtab; |
| 6261 | } |
| 6262 | |
| 6263 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6264 | |
| 6265 | void |
| 6266 | symbol_set_symtab (struct symbol *symbol, struct symtab *symtab) |
| 6267 | { |
| 6268 | gdb_assert (SYMBOL_OBJFILE_OWNED (symbol)); |
| 6269 | symbol->owner.symtab = symtab; |
| 6270 | } |
| 6271 | |
| 6272 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6273 | |
| 6274 | CORE_ADDR |
| 6275 | get_symbol_address (const struct symbol *sym) |
| 6276 | { |
| 6277 | gdb_assert (sym->maybe_copied); |
| 6278 | gdb_assert (SYMBOL_CLASS (sym) == LOC_STATIC); |
| 6279 | |
| 6280 | const char *linkage_name = SYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (sym); |
| 6281 | |
| 6282 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 6283 | { |
| 6284 | bound_minimal_symbol minsym |
| 6285 | = lookup_minimal_symbol_linkage (linkage_name, objfile); |
| 6286 | if (minsym.minsym != nullptr) |
| 6287 | return BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (minsym); |
| 6288 | } |
| 6289 | return sym->ginfo.value.address; |
| 6290 | } |
| 6291 | |
| 6292 | /* See symtab.h. */ |
| 6293 | |
| 6294 | CORE_ADDR |
| 6295 | get_msymbol_address (struct objfile *objf, const struct minimal_symbol *minsym) |
| 6296 | { |
| 6297 | gdb_assert (minsym->maybe_copied); |
| 6298 | gdb_assert ((objf->flags & OBJF_MAINLINE) == 0); |
| 6299 | |
| 6300 | const char *linkage_name = MSYMBOL_LINKAGE_NAME (minsym); |
| 6301 | |
| 6302 | for (objfile *objfile : current_program_space->objfiles ()) |
| 6303 | { |
| 6304 | if ((objfile->flags & OBJF_MAINLINE) != 0) |
| 6305 | { |
| 6306 | bound_minimal_symbol found |
| 6307 | = lookup_minimal_symbol_linkage (linkage_name, objfile); |
| 6308 | if (found.minsym != nullptr) |
| 6309 | return BMSYMBOL_VALUE_ADDRESS (found); |
| 6310 | } |
| 6311 | } |
| 6312 | return (minsym->value.address |
| 6313 | + ANOFFSET (objf->section_offsets, minsym->section)); |
| 6314 | } |
| 6315 | |
| 6316 | \f |
| 6317 | |
| 6318 | void |
| 6319 | _initialize_symtab (void) |
| 6320 | { |
| 6321 | cmd_list_element *c; |
| 6322 | |
| 6323 | initialize_ordinary_address_classes (); |
| 6324 | |
| 6325 | c = add_info ("variables", info_variables_command, |
| 6326 | info_print_args_help (_("\ |
| 6327 | All global and static variable names or those matching REGEXPs.\n\ |
| 6328 | Usage: info variables [-q] [-n] [-t TYPEREGEXP] [NAMEREGEXP]\n\ |
| 6329 | Prints the global and static variables.\n"), |
| 6330 | _("global and static variables"), |
| 6331 | true)); |
| 6332 | set_cmd_completer_handle_brkchars (c, info_print_command_completer); |
| 6333 | if (dbx_commands) |
| 6334 | { |
| 6335 | c = add_com ("whereis", class_info, info_variables_command, |
| 6336 | info_print_args_help (_("\ |
| 6337 | All global and static variable names, or those matching REGEXPs.\n\ |
| 6338 | Usage: whereis [-q] [-n] [-t TYPEREGEXP] [NAMEREGEXP]\n\ |
| 6339 | Prints the global and static variables.\n"), |
| 6340 | _("global and static variables"), |
| 6341 | true)); |
| 6342 | set_cmd_completer_handle_brkchars (c, info_print_command_completer); |
| 6343 | } |
| 6344 | |
| 6345 | c = add_info ("functions", info_functions_command, |
| 6346 | info_print_args_help (_("\ |
| 6347 | All function names or those matching REGEXPs.\n\ |
| 6348 | Usage: info functions [-q] [-n] [-t TYPEREGEXP] [NAMEREGEXP]\n\ |
| 6349 | Prints the functions.\n"), |
| 6350 | _("functions"), |
| 6351 | true)); |
| 6352 | set_cmd_completer_handle_brkchars (c, info_print_command_completer); |
| 6353 | |
| 6354 | c = add_info ("types", info_types_command, _("\ |
| 6355 | All type names, or those matching REGEXP.\n\ |
| 6356 | Usage: info types [-q] [REGEXP]\n\ |
| 6357 | Print information about all types matching REGEXP, or all types if no\n\ |
| 6358 | REGEXP is given. The optional flag -q disables printing of headers.")); |
| 6359 | set_cmd_completer_handle_brkchars (c, info_types_command_completer); |
| 6360 | |
| 6361 | const auto info_sources_opts = make_info_sources_options_def_group (nullptr); |
| 6362 | |
| 6363 | static std::string info_sources_help |
| 6364 | = gdb::option::build_help (_("\ |
| 6365 | All source files in the program or those matching REGEXP.\n\ |
| 6366 | Usage: info sources [OPTION]... [REGEXP]\n\ |
| 6367 | By default, REGEXP is used to match anywhere in the filename.\n\ |
| 6368 | \n\ |
| 6369 | Options:\n\ |
| 6370 | %OPTIONS%"), |
| 6371 | info_sources_opts); |
| 6372 | |
| 6373 | c = add_info ("sources", info_sources_command, info_sources_help.c_str ()); |
| 6374 | set_cmd_completer_handle_brkchars (c, info_sources_command_completer); |
| 6375 | |
| 6376 | add_com ("rbreak", class_breakpoint, rbreak_command, |
| 6377 | _("Set a breakpoint for all functions matching REGEXP.")); |
| 6378 | |
| 6379 | add_setshow_enum_cmd ("multiple-symbols", no_class, |
| 6380 | multiple_symbols_modes, &multiple_symbols_mode, |
| 6381 | _("\ |
| 6382 | Set how the debugger handles ambiguities in expressions."), _("\ |
| 6383 | Show how the debugger handles ambiguities in expressions."), _("\ |
| 6384 | Valid values are \"ask\", \"all\", \"cancel\", and the default is \"all\"."), |
| 6385 | NULL, NULL, &setlist, &showlist); |
| 6386 | |
| 6387 | add_setshow_boolean_cmd ("basenames-may-differ", class_obscure, |
| 6388 | &basenames_may_differ, _("\ |
| 6389 | Set whether a source file may have multiple base names."), _("\ |
| 6390 | Show whether a source file may have multiple base names."), _("\ |
| 6391 | (A \"base name\" is the name of a file with the directory part removed.\n\ |
| 6392 | Example: The base name of \"/home/user/hello.c\" is \"hello.c\".)\n\ |
| 6393 | If set, GDB will canonicalize file names (e.g., expand symlinks)\n\ |
| 6394 | before comparing them. Canonicalization is an expensive operation,\n\ |
| 6395 | but it allows the same file be known by more than one base name.\n\ |
| 6396 | If not set (the default), all source files are assumed to have just\n\ |
| 6397 | one base name, and gdb will do file name comparisons more efficiently."), |
| 6398 | NULL, NULL, |
| 6399 | &setlist, &showlist); |
| 6400 | |
| 6401 | add_setshow_zuinteger_cmd ("symtab-create", no_class, &symtab_create_debug, |
| 6402 | _("Set debugging of symbol table creation."), |
| 6403 | _("Show debugging of symbol table creation."), _("\ |
| 6404 | When enabled (non-zero), debugging messages are printed when building\n\ |
| 6405 | symbol tables. A value of 1 (one) normally provides enough information.\n\ |
| 6406 | A value greater than 1 provides more verbose information."), |
| 6407 | NULL, |
| 6408 | NULL, |
| 6409 | &setdebuglist, &showdebuglist); |
| 6410 | |
| 6411 | add_setshow_zuinteger_cmd ("symbol-lookup", no_class, &symbol_lookup_debug, |
| 6412 | _("\ |
| 6413 | Set debugging of symbol lookup."), _("\ |
| 6414 | Show debugging of symbol lookup."), _("\ |
| 6415 | When enabled (non-zero), symbol lookups are logged."), |
| 6416 | NULL, NULL, |
| 6417 | &setdebuglist, &showdebuglist); |
| 6418 | |
| 6419 | add_setshow_zuinteger_cmd ("symbol-cache-size", no_class, |
| 6420 | &new_symbol_cache_size, |
| 6421 | _("Set the size of the symbol cache."), |
| 6422 | _("Show the size of the symbol cache."), _("\ |
| 6423 | The size of the symbol cache.\n\ |
| 6424 | If zero then the symbol cache is disabled."), |
| 6425 | set_symbol_cache_size_handler, NULL, |
| 6426 | &maintenance_set_cmdlist, |
| 6427 | &maintenance_show_cmdlist); |
| 6428 | |
| 6429 | add_cmd ("symbol-cache", class_maintenance, maintenance_print_symbol_cache, |
| 6430 | _("Dump the symbol cache for each program space."), |
| 6431 | &maintenanceprintlist); |
| 6432 | |
| 6433 | add_cmd ("symbol-cache-statistics", class_maintenance, |
| 6434 | maintenance_print_symbol_cache_statistics, |
| 6435 | _("Print symbol cache statistics for each program space."), |
| 6436 | &maintenanceprintlist); |
| 6437 | |
| 6438 | add_cmd ("flush-symbol-cache", class_maintenance, |
| 6439 | maintenance_flush_symbol_cache, |
| 6440 | _("Flush the symbol cache for each program space."), |
| 6441 | &maintenancelist); |
| 6442 | |
| 6443 | gdb::observers::executable_changed.attach (symtab_observer_executable_changed); |
| 6444 | gdb::observers::new_objfile.attach (symtab_new_objfile_observer); |
| 6445 | gdb::observers::free_objfile.attach (symtab_free_objfile_observer); |
| 6446 | } |